Home

Gemini User Guide - Ag Tech Services

1. Setting Description Add Sensor Add a new sensor Edit Sensor Edit or view the settings for an existing sensor Remove Sensor Delete an existing sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information Setting Description Sensor Type Select from e Air pressure vacuum e Liquid pressure e NH3 pressure e Bin level e RPM e Gate Height Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 261 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field IQ Setup aT Setting Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override Speed This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Boundary Switch off The system will not apply outside t
2. FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Setting Example Coverage shows Height Altitude of GPS receiver GPS Quality GPS signal quality Cut Fill Cut and or fill FieldLevel Variety Different varieties See Logging varieties page 65 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 49 3 Getting Started 50 Setting Example Coverage shows Applied Rate Shows variations in application rate Speed Variations in the speed of the vehicle as different colors on the Run screen Average The position of the implement Cross Track Error XTE FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Guidance window The guidance window shows your vehicle coverage field features and guidance lines and for coverage mapping sections appear on the implement Implement with sections For a description of how you can view the guidance window see Run screen view modes page 31 Selecting a swath pattern To obtain guidance with the FmX integrated display you can use e One of the four standard swath pattern types e The FreeForm guidance pattern See Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern page 56 Use the standard patterns to create different shaped guidance lines on the display Straight Curved guidance guidance lines lines Guidance Pivot guidance lines line
3. E 5 Tap Save Vehicle 6 Inthe Save Vehicle Configuration screen select the Filename field 7 Inthe Enter Save Filename screen enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap OK 8 In the Edit Vehicle screen tap OK Your current vehicle profile is saved 132 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the GPS receiver When you install the Autopilot option the GPS Receiver option is also installed For instructions on configuring the GPS receiver see The GPS Receiver page 149 Adjusting the Aggressiveness setting Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes e A higher Aggressiveness setting brings the vehicle back online faster but may cause tight oscillations about the line e A lower Aggressiveness setting is slower to bring the vehicle back online but can avoid overshoot 1l From the Run screen select the Autopilot tab 2 Use the or button to adjust the setting Note The default Aggressiveness setting is 100 For a description of the Autopilot Engage button see Engage button page 47 Display only mode The FmX integrated display can be used as a standalone display for a NavController II that is connected to an external GPS receiver When used in this mode the FmX integrated display s two internal GNSS receivers are not used by the NavController II but they are still available for other applications
4. Field IQ Plugin icon Mapping Information Change the mapping information that appears on your screen See Mapping tab information tab page 48 Row Status Indicator There are various shades of green yellow and red These shades reflect how tab far off target the rows are applying Green Rows are applying on target Red Rows are applying off target Black Rows have been manually turned off White Rows have been turned off automatically by the system Field IQ Status tab Shows the engage status of each row on the implement Green Engaged Gray Section closed due to overlap Red Not engaged or section manually turned off Tap the blue arrows to toggle between the Row Status Indicator tab and the Field IQ Status tab Engage button Green Auto guidance engaged Gray Auto guidance can be engaged Red Auto guidance cannot be engaged 228 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Feature Description Logging button Green Logging enabled Red Logging Tap a material in this example Corn to view more details Page 1 of the plugin tab werage Spacing 5 80 ality Spacing 95 8 0 0 10 2 Page 2 of the plugin tab Description The name of the material you are viewing Tap to turn the material on or off 0 0 Tap to turn auto section control on or off Current information about the event
5. Setting Description Sensor Type Select from e Air pressure vacuum e Liquid pressure e NH3 pressure e Bin level e RPM e Gate Height Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor 272 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Operation tab Field IQ Setup ow Setting Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override Speed This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Boundary Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled By Rate Snapping Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled individually Disabled The Material
6. The system is now configured to receive remote data from an external device FmX Integrated Display User Guide 387 16 The Serial Data Input Plugin 388 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Productivity Monitoring Plugin In this chapter The Productivity Monitoring plugin enables the FmX integrated display to interface with an Enalta CDA 1000 display for sugar cane m Configuring the Productivity harvesting Monitoring plugin m Installation This chapter explains how to combine the two m Operation systems so that the information from both displays appears on the FmX integrated display Note To use this plugin you must have an Enalta CCT system FmX Integrated Display User Guide 389 17 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin Installation 1 Install the FmX integrated display harness and GPS receiver See Installing the display page 35 2 Connect the Enalta sensors to a serial port on the FmX integrated display harness Configuring the Productivity Monitoring plugin 1 Install the Productivity Monitoring plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 170 2 On the Configuration screen select the Productivity Monitoring plugin and then tap Setup Productivity Monitoring Setup Q 3 In the Port list select the port on the FmX integrated display harness that the Enalta sensors are connected to 390 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Productivity Monitoring Plugin 17 4 Adjust the
7. Latitude The vehicle s current latitude Line Feature Length The length of the current line feature Local Time The current local time Long term XTE A vehicle Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur more than one hour apart Longitude The vehicle s current longitude NDVI Normalized Difference Vegetation Index Nearest Point Name The name of the nearest point feature Network ID The RTK network ID of the GPS receiver s corrections Network Status The current status of the wireless cellular network North The distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin point Nudge The amount of nudge currently applied Nudge Trim The amount of nudge or trim currently applied Offline Dist The distance away from the guidance line Offset X The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark Offset Y The Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark P Altitude The current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver P Blade Height The current height of the primary blade P Boot Depth The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model P CMR Percent P Correction Age The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the prim
8. wheel This is a course aggressiveness adjustment If the setting is too low the system may require several attempts to reach the line With the vehicle moving forward along the A B line Nudge the vehicle left or right 1 m 3 from the A B line b Engage the EZ Steer system c Adjust the Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged the vehicle moves close to the guidance line To make Do the following More aggressive turns Decrease the Angle per Turn value Less aggressive turns Increase the Angle per Turn value Note Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to optimize EZ Steer performance for each step in the calibration FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 141 142 5 Vehicle Guidance Options To configure the Aggressiveness settings select the Step 2 tab The Aggressiveness setting fine tunes how aggressively the system holds the line If the setting is too low the vehicle will not hold the line if the setting is too high the vehicle may over correct and make S turns Adjust the Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S turns To make Do the following More aggressive turns Increase the Aggressiveness value Less aggressive turns Decrease the Aggressiveness value To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings select th
9. 2 upgrade TaskData folder The TaskData directory contains yield data collected in the IS011783 BIN format which is read by Farm Works and other precision Agriculture software titles FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 449 23 Data Management Files on the USB memory stick 450 Field boundary and AB Line files There is one set of boundary and AB Line shapefiles for each field called e Boundary e Swaths Information stored in the Boundary shp file for fields with boundaries includes a boundary polygon Fields without boundaries do not contain a boundary file Information stored in the Swaths shp file for fields with boundaries includes AB polylines Units are always metric in files created by the FmX integrated display The following information is stored in the boundary and ABLine attribute files Column Field description Notes Date Date the field was created YYYYMMDD Time Field creation time local time am pm format hh mm ss Version Boundary or ABLine attribute file version ID AB Line number ID Name Name assigned to the AB Line Area Field area Boundary area ha Perimeter Field perimeter distance Boundary only meters Length Length of the AB Line meters Swathsin Dist1 Dist2 PrefWeight Unless a field has a boundary the size of the field is not defined Therefore for fields without boundaries the _Complete in the EventHistory dbf file is always zero
10. 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the Rawson modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the module that you want to calibrate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above Field IQ Calibration 244 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 3 Select the first module to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears Planter Calibration amp Rate Controller 4937801425 Calibrate umas Note Ifa Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically Setting Description Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the applicaiton rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for
11. AB Lines the FieldLevel II system Copy the design control file into Autopilot the AgGPS Designs folder on a USB memory stick m a aag If the USB memory stick has not yet been used with the omm FmX integrated display the AgGPS Designs folder will not q exist To create the directory on the USB memory stick D 1 Insert the USB memory stick into the back of the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 199 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins 2 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup The System Setup screen appears 3 From the list of system settings on the left select Data Files and then tap Manage The Data Files management screen appears 4 From the list on the right directories that already exist in the display select the Designs directory and then tap Copy The directory is copied to the USB memory stick 5 When the Copy completed message appears tap OK The copied directory appears in the list of directories on the left side of the Data Files screen Working with MultiPlane designs When the leveling model is set to Multiplane Design and the FmX integrated display opens a field it scans the AgGPS Designs folder and any MultiPlane gps control files that are close to your current position are displayed Select the appropriate control file and then tap OK The control file will be loaded displaying a color cut fill map of the field red cut blue fill
12. Description Example Small red arrow pointing down The blade is beyond the On Grade Limit value above the target height Large red arrow pointing down The blade is considerably above the target height more than double the On Grade Limit value The arrow points in the direction that the blade needs to move for the blade to be on grade The size of the up or down arrow indicates the amount of movement required FieldLevel Il status text items Status text items describe factors in leveling models Note The FieldLevel II status items all begin with P which denotes the Primary GPS receiver If you have the Tandem Dual plugin installed you will also have S status items available which denotes Secondary Item Description P Altitude The current GPS altitude of the blade P Blade Height The current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected P Boot Depth P CMR Percent The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model The percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS receiver P Correction Age The time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base station P Correction Type The solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float etc P Cut fill The difference between the blade height a
13. FmX Integrated Display User Guide 229 10 The Field IQ Plugin Description Target rate Tap the button to select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown or to select Manual to turn the Targt rate off Tap the button to decrease the Target rate by 1 tap the button to increase the Target rate by 1 Tap to go to page 1 or to page 2 of the plugin tab Tap to return to the previous plugin screen Tap to go to the Row Details tab Current sensor status 6 ooo 0 Depending on the material the following buttons appear Bin Tap to go to the Virtual Bin Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the bin settings Seed Disc Tap to fill the seed disk Arm Pump Tap to enable Field IQ to control the pump Gate Setup Tap to go to the Gate Setup screen Density Tap to go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the current product There ar various shades of green yellow and red These shades reflect how far off target the rows ar applying Green Rows are applying on target Red Rows are applying off target Black Rows have been manually turned off White Rows have been turned off automatically by the system Tap the arrows to view more row numbers General setup information 230 Do the following prior to setting up the Field IQ system for planting spraying and so on Before starting the Field IQ plugin setup on the FmX integrated display ensure that
14. If you try to load a line that is over 100 km 63 miles away the following message appears Your current position is too far from the field to work in it Adding an access path An access path is a space between your guidance lines They can be useful if there is road or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths through the middle of your field You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern but not headlands or pivots Specify the location and width of the access path when you create the line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 59 3 Getting Started l From the Swath Management screen tap Access Paths Enter a value in the Swaths between access paths field This value must be equal to or higher than the Swaths in first group setting The next access path will appear this number of swaths beyond the first access path and will continue to repeat after this number of swaths Note You must fill in both of these fields 3 4 Enter a value in the Path width field This is the width of the access paths Enter a value in the Swaths between access paths field The access path will appear after this number of swaths including the master line Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group left to right field This setting enables you to specify where the master line appears in the first group from left to right Select whether the guidance will be based on swaths or access paths
15. In this mode you must use the special adaptor cable P N 76442 with the standard FmX FM 1000 to NavController II cable P N 75741 or P N 65522 to connect the display to the P4 display port on the NavController II Note You must install the Autopilot option to use the display only functionality of the FmxX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 133 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Connecting the FmX integrated display for display only mode P3 GPS connector af amp 1109 ozea O D Bagdad A CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController Il harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble part number 1 FmX integrated display 93100 01 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 O Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 e 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 NavController II 55563 00 f8 Cable assembly 8 pin to 12 pin adaptor 76442 Cable AgGPS 252 252 to NavController II 54608 Main NavController II cable 54601 oO AgGPS 252 262 receiver 55500 32 To configure the display only mode do the following 134 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 1 Inthe Current Configura
16. Note If you browse the dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet date fields may appear in a different format depending on your local settings FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Coverage logging data Data Management 23 Coverage logging files are created when any application coverage is recorded For each coverage polygon the following information is saved to the coverage logging file Column Field description Version Coverage attribute file version GPS_Status Numeric GPS status value Status_Txt GPS status description Swath The current swath number when coverage was recorded Height Height in meters DateClosed Date the polygon was closed TimeClosed Time the polygon was closed AppliedRate Applied rate reported by the variable rate controller Speed Average GPS ground speed for the polygon in meters per second XTE Implement Cross Track Error in meters AppType Application type ID Track logging files Track logging files are created whenever the event is opened See Track logging files page 76 At each point a number of attributes are recorded The units stored in the track attribute file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf are in metric units The following information is stored for each point in the track logging attribute file Column Field description Units notes TRACK_ID Date and time stamp Version Track attribute file version UTC_Dat
17. Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 281 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Setting Description Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a scr
18. Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting e Row Crop Seed e Liquid e Granular Seed e Granular Fertilizer e Anhydrous Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 e Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 e Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied e Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material 278 FmX Integrated
19. The level of nitrogen currently in the tank Tank Level NH3 The level of anhydrous ammonia currently in the tank Tank Bin Level The current level of the tank or bin Target Rate The application target rate Total Boundaries Area The total area between the current boundaries Total Seed Rate The total seed rate that is currently being applied Total Vol Applied Total Vol Applied N The total volume of material applied The total volume of nitrogen applied Total Vol Applied NH3 Transfer Status The total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied Connected Farm transfer activity TrueGuide Roll Roll corrections in degrees that are applied TrueGuide Trim The distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted 84 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Item Description Up The vertical height of the vehicle relative to the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin point VDOP The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel Il GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better Vehicle Model The model of vehicle that is configured Vehicle Type The type of vehicle that is configured Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error i
20. e Blockage Sensitivity Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given e When no pulses are sensed for this amount of time the alarm triggers e Multiples Threshold If two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing it is considered a double Lowering this number requires seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double e Skips Threshold If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing it is considered a skip Raising this number requires seeds to be further apart to be a skip e Averaging Sample Size This is the number of seeds used to calculate the average Increasing this amount makes the response slower but more stable e Misplaced Seeds Threshold If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it s considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality 234 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Layout tab The Field IQ Plugin 10 Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Pow Monitor q gt Setting Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capa
21. e Lbs actual N Pounds kg of nitrogen per acre hectare e Lbs NH3 Pounds kg of anhydrous per acre hectare Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 e Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 e Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied e Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material 300 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Layout tab The Field IQ Plugin 10 Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the m
22. 200 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 When you use a MultiPlane design control file the FieldLevel II system remains in Auto mode if you drive off the design but maintains the design height it had when you left the design If you disengage Auto mode when you are off the design the display will not allow you to re engage the FieldLevel II system until your position is back over the color cut fill map 5900000000000 01MEIO 0000000000000 H Leveling model specific information You have different leveling options depending on the leveling mode that you selected see Step 2 Configuring the leveling model page 190 For information specific to the leveling model e For Point and Slope mode see below e For Autoslope mode see page 203 e For Flat Plane Laser mode see page 208 e For Flat Plane GPS mode see page 208 e For Contour mode see page 214 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 201 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Driving in Point and Slope mode When you drive in Point and Slope mode the FieldLevel II tab appears as follows Tap To Edit Edit the design slope button Increase the design slope by the Slope Adjust amount button Decrease the design slope by the Slope Adjust amount Bench or Rebench Create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 180 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Delete Benchmark Delete any benchm
23. 458 Data Management Copying data To copy data from the USB memory stick to the internal memory or from the internal memory to the USB memory stick 1 From the list select the item to copy Ifthe item is in the USB list the lt Copy button becomes available Ifthe item is in the nternal Storage list the Copy gt button becomes available 2 Tap Copy The data is copied to the other column To copy data from the current USB memory stick the source to another USB memory stick the destination 1 Copy all of the data from the source to the internal memory 2 When copying is complete remove the source from the USB slot and then insert the destination 3 Copy all of the data from the internal memory to the destination Deleting data If you need to create more space you can use the FmX integrated display to e Delete any unused clients farms fields events or all of the data in the internal memory e Delete any unused clients farms fields events or all of the data on the USB memory stick Deleting selected data from the internal memory CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears a A Ww N H
24. 463 24 Troubleshooting Advanced diagnostics the System option Diagnostics mode enables you to configure advanced guidance settings Most users will not need to adjust these settings 1 From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Diagnostics Seria Port System information Advanced Settings Power Levels r Connector A __ Connector C Serial Sent 0 Serial Sent 2472 Received 0 Received 6029 CAN Devices 1 Connector B r Connector D 6 Sent Sent 0 Received 0 Received 14 CAN Devices 0 error 105 2 Tap Advanced Serial Port System Information Advanced Settings Power Levels 464 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 3 Select the diagnostics level This determines how much debugging information is logged in the program files Item Description 1 Minimal level of information 6 default Medium level of information 9 Highest level of information 4 Select whether or not to show swath control points When the guidance line is a curve it appears on screen as a series of short straight sections joined together The Swath Control Points appear where these line segments meet Item Description Hidden default Normal guidance lines Visible Guidance lines show the control points You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data For more information see Viewing raw serial data p
25. Error Steering Close To End Stops Meaning Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering angle approached the end stops Retry and if the problem persists instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Error Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped Error No GPS The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected Retry and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure Error No Steering Response Detected During the calibration cycle insufficient movement was sensed in order for the calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty Error Unable To Determine DZ Try Again A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if the problem persists contact Technical Support Proportional steering gain calibration Note Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the TrueTracker system performance is
26. From the starting point the vehicle levels at a constant slope regardless of its direction See Slope adjust for Point and Slope leveling page 191 Autoslope Creates a tile or surface drainage design at an optimal depth within a set of constraints The slope will not be constant providing the most efficient tile or ditch design See Driving in Autoslope mode page 203 Flat Plane laser Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the onboard software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope It uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement However the design heights are corrected to a plane surface to match your old laser leveled fields See Configuring settings for all leveling models page 191 Flat Plane GPS Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope It uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement See Configuring settings for all leveling models page 191 190 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Leveling model Description Contour Multiplane design Uses more complex surface designs imported from the MultiPlane design software See Working with MultiPlane designs page 200 Uses the FmX integrated display vi
27. Ifthe AB Line file contains more than one AB Line all AB Lines in the file are imported 8 Select the AB Line that you want to use and then tap Load A warning message appears 9 Tap OK The imported field or AB Line is ready to use 10 For best results close the field and then reopen it FmX Integrated Display User Guide 455 23 Data Management The Prescriptions folder For each prescription that you generate the AgGPS Prescriptions folder stores three prescription files in ESRI shapefile format or a single gdx file The shapefiles required are the dbf shp and shx files Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files if they are on the USB memory stick they are ignored The names and types of files that are used to supply input information to the FmX integrated display and the folder where these files must be located on the card are as follows Data Prescription files Description Polygons ESRI shapefiles Aginfo GDX Files lt prescriptionname gt shp lt prescriptionname gt dbf lt prescriptionname gt shx lt prescriptionname gt gdx folder AgGP3S Prescriptions For more information see Prescriptions page 67 The following figure shows the contents of a Prescriptions folder Address WD Desktop My Ovcuments S W my computer 5 O agers a a Local Disk C 2 ovo rw Orive 0 B SanDisk ImageMate E
28. P Offset The relative offset in the vertical component P Offset X The relative offset in the X component P Offset Y The relative offset in the Y component P Satellites The number of satellites in the GPS GLONASS solution P Section Line Number The line number selected for design in AutoSlope This is the current section line being recorded in the field P Speed The current speed of the vehicle P Survey Cut Fill The cut fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been processed in AutoPlane P Target Height P Up The height the blade will attempt to reach This is the design height the offset When the blade reaches the target height the arrows turn green The difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP P VDOP The vertical dilution of precision P Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel GPS receiver 198 These status text items can be set to appear permanently at the top of the screen or ona slide out tab The following items can also be viewed from the Run screen FieldLevel GPS status FieldLevel Number of satellites e FieldLevel correction age e To configure the status items see Status items page 77 Reloading a field When you create a design for a field for example a target leveling plane the design is saved in the field directory The design files are
29. Rate switch is in position 1 e Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 e Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied e Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material Tap Setup to set alarm thresholds and adjust the way seed statistics are calculated e Blockage Sensitivity Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given FmX Integrated Display User Guide 253 10 The Field IQ Plugin Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Pow Monitor q
30. Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two more than the number of filed calibration areas sampled This allows for starting at zero and ending at 99 NDVI Select a NDVI field to enter a custom value Tap OK Select a corresponding Rate field to enter a custom value Tap OK Select the Output tab In the Material Type list select either Granular or Liquid Tap OK FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker diagnostics The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and provides any error conditions The appearance of both the hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates that the FmX integrated display and RT200 are communicating Erroneous data The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation and if a sensor reports erroneous data the data is not included in the rate control calculation Erroneous data can come from mud on the sensor lenses sensors viewing concrete snow wet asphalt or other non soil or non plant surface Error conditions Error conditions include sensors disconnected from the CAN bus or a sensor transmitting invalid data Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions or more commonly ifit is seeing a target other than plants and soil For example when setting up the system the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet asphalt either of t
31. depending upon the implement s being used 1 From the Configuration screen select the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Setup 2 By default the Type field is set to Tandem Back and can control two implements one towed behind the other If a single implement is to be used in a dual configuration select Dual Right from the Type drop down list 3 Enter the appropriate value in the Antenna Height field This value relates to the antenna installed on either the rear implement or the antenna installed on the right side of a single implement Note In the FieldLevel II plugin the Antenna Height value can be altered from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either the front implement or the antenna installed on the left side of a single implement Note Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna 4 Enter the appropriate value in the Disengage Raise field 218 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 This value is used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single implement when Auto is disengaged If you set it to 0 000s then the blade will not move up when you disengage Note In the FieldLevel I plugin the Disengage Raise value can be altered from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the front implements blade or the left side of the blade on a single implement Note For a tandem system you will want to move the b
32. increments of the default rate Select the percentage used on FmX integrated display If you have a dual channel Rawson Accu Rate controller see page 373 Configuring the controller To allow the display to change the rates on the controller the controller must first be put into GPS mode Otherwise the display will log only the rates being used 1 Turn on the controller 2 Tap the MODE button twice FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 3 Tap the SET button to switch the controller between GPS and non GPS Communications Connect the FmX integrated display to the controller with Rawson cable P N 69730 and Trimble cable P N 67091 and set the controller baud rate to 9600 Using the controller When in GPS mode the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the display allow the drive to be on Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position If you need to quickly turn off the hydraulic drive use the switch on the controller Non GPS mode The FmX integrated display sends commands to the controller If communication cannot be established it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode A message appears and gives you the option to continue in Non GPS mode If the controller is set to Non GPS mode the display still shows and records as applied rates If a prescription is loaded target rates appear for reference but these are not used by the co
33. or just at the ends of the field to center the steering Note Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero Steering Note If the implement is consistently offline there may be a roll calibration issue Recheck the roll calibration Configuring the Engage button You can configure the Engage button to work in two different ways Item Description Single press The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and vehicle steering e The second tap disengages automated steering Two stage press The Engage button requires two taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages automated steering To configure how the Engage button works see Configuring the implement controller page 349 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Serial Rate Control Plugin In this chapter The FmX integrated display can be connected to third party variable rate controllers by a range of m Non Trimble variable rate meant turers controllers This chapter describes how to configure the BE ee mation for non display for use with these rate controllers Trimble variable rate controllers Note You can install only one variable rate control plug at a time FmX Integrated Display User Guide 367 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin Non Trimble variable rate controllers 368 The
34. or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements e Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Gate Setup Enter the following measurements e Gate Height e Gate Width e Drag chain length per turn of the drag shaft Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Control Setting Description Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 231 280 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement a
35. section valves that return flow to tank when the boom section is off Plumbing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase application rate Bypass Valve is in the Return to Tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate Valve Behavior on Sections Closed Close When all sections are off the control valve returns to the closed position Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve If you have an Auxiliary Valve installed select one of the following Master Valve closes when the system is turned off Dump Valve opens to dump flow to return line when the system is turned off Pump Disarming Switch Enable Select this option if you have a Pump Disarming Switch installed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 285 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio 286 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugi
36. select the preferred option from the Display Units drop down list Metric Feet and Inches Decimal Feet The default option is Feet and Inches 4 Set the keyboard layout The FmX integrated display uses a virtual keyboard on the touch screen for you to enter characters see page 25 The virtual keyboard can be laid out in two ways Setting Description ABCDEF The letters appear in alphabetical order QWERTY The keyboard is laid out like the QWERTY keyboard on a computer Select your preferred option from the Keyboard Layout drop down list The default option is ABCDEF 88 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Default settings To restore the settings of the FmX integrated display to the factory default settings select Default Settings and then tap Restore Feature mapping 1 From the Display Setup screen select Feature Mapping and then tap Setup The four large buttons represent the field feature buttons that appear on the Mapping tab on the Run screen see The Run screen layout page 45 2 Inthe Mapping Location group select Boom Left Boom Center or Boom Right as the point on the vehicle where the feature will be created Fora Point feature select from the Point Features drop down list ForaLine or Area feature select from the Line Area Features drop down list FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 89 4 Display Setup 3 Select one of the four feature buttons
37. that you check this setting before you start using the system in a new installation by engaging on a line and then turning the wheel until EZ Steer disengages To adjust the amount of force required to disengage the system change the Override Sensitivity in the EZ Steer Setup screen The EZ Steer system automatically disengages when e The vehicle is outside the engage limits configured in the Engage Options screen e The system is paused e GPS positions are lost e The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions for example no corrections e To manually disengage the system do one of the following Tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor Press the optional remote engage foot pedal FmX Integrated Display User Guide 145 5 Vehicle Guidance Options When the system is not in use hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it with the lock pin EZ Steer plugin screen The EZ Steer tab on the Run screen shows the current nudge increment and online aggressiveness values e Tap either the lt or gt button to increase or decrease the Nudge Increment setting by the Nudge gt distance set in the Steering Settings setup screen 0 0 0 e Tap either the or button to increase or decrease the
38. 5 From the Trigger Warning list select one of the following settings Item Description No Warning No warning appears Entering Area A warning appears while you are inside the area Leaving Area A warning appears while you are outside the area Note The Remote Output and Trigger Warning settings relate only to this type of area feature They do not apply to any of your other area features You must set the warning for each type of area feature individually 6 Tap OK The new area feature appears in the Area list 7 Select the new feature from the list and then tap OK The new feature appears on the button you selected 8 Tap OK For more information on applying field features during navigation see Placing field features on screen page 63 Activating field boundaries The FmX integrated display includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiple bounded areas within a field Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field 1 From the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the Selected Features buttons The Select Feature screen appears 2 From the feature drop down list select Area and then tap New FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 From the list of features select Boundary and then tap Edit Edit Area Feature Set one or more of the following the attribute
39. As list select the unit of measure In the Rates tab enter the default rate and step size for the controller in the Default Rate and Step Size text fields FmX Integrated Display User Guide 369 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 7 Inthe Rate Snapping list select Enabled or Disabled Comm Rate Sections Default Rate 13 90 g l a Step Size 0 11 gala Rate Snapping Enabled v owm _ 8 Tap OK Comm Rate Number of ool 8 9 Inthe Rates tab enter the number of sections in the Number of Sections field 370 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Configuring the variable rate controller If you specified a variable rate controller type the FmX integrated display initiates communications with the controller each time that you open a field Communications are terminated when you close the field If the FmX integrated display cannot communicate with the controller e A message appears identifying the problem If the specified controller type has a configurable baud rate the error message includes details of the baud rate that the FmX integrated display requires the controller to use e The Applied rate disappears from the Run screen e Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected Raven To use a Raven controller with an FmX integrated display the controller must e be GPS ready e use Raven s latest communicati
40. Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Manual position e Ifthe section switch is in the on up position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be on This overrides the FmX integrated display and coverage logging is ignored e Ifthe section switch is in the off down position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be off This overrides the FmX integrated display and coverage logging is ignored The LED has the following status indicators e Green The unit is powered and is communicating with the FmX integrated display e Yellow The unit is initializing communications with the FmX integrated display e Red The unit is powered but not communicating with the FmX integrated display Field IQ Run screen The Field IQ Run screen has three pages e Page 1 shows current information about an event and allows you to manipulate the materials and sections e Page 2 shows additional information on the current event e Page 3 shows row details Click the arrow key to move between the pages FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 227 10 The Field IQ Plugin The following shows the Field IQ run screen with the main plugin screen 990000000090 999000000000P 5 Feature Description Materials list Up to 6 materials are listed The current Target and Actual rates are shown for each material Tap a material to show details of that material see following page
41. Calibration Constant 201 290725 De mE 8 Enter the Gate Width and Drag Chain Distance Per Rev The system calculates the Calibration Constant 9 Tap OK to return to the Granular Calibration Screen 10 Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the calibration and then tap Calibrate AN CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 11 The Granular Calibration screen appears Rate Controller 5015561943 Enter the desired amount of material to be dispensed then press Start Amount of Material to be d 100 00 bs Target Rate 200 00 Ibs a _ J Calibrate FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 297 10 The Field IQ Plugin 12 13 14 15 Enter the following values Amount of Material to be Dispensed This is the amount dispensed during the calibration Target Rate Target Speed To begin the calibration tap Start and then follow the on screen instructions Select the Jnfo tab to view the system s operational limits based on the RPM limits target rates and application width Tap OK Operating in the field 1 2 From the Home screen tap et From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK 298 FmxX
42. Coarse Blade Step amount This enables the operator to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 203 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Tap To Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are relative to the section line Logging Log the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file will also be created with cut fill and height information i 4 999000000000 999000000090 E 5 ra S Surveying your alignment for tile or ditch Before you begin using Autoslope you must set the Survey Height Offset This offset will be applied to the heights of your surveyed alignment preventing the need to rebench before installing tile This means that you can survey the alignment and then install tile straight away To set the Survey Height Offset do the following 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin and then tap Setup The Survey Setup screen appears 2 On the tile plow raise the boot as high as it will go and measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground Tile plow raised up to maximum height Survey height offset Ground surface 204 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 3 Enter this value int
43. FmX integrated display supports the following non Trimble variable rate controllers Make Model See page Raven SCS 440 440DB 450 450DB 460 660 661 700 710 750 760 page 371 Rawson Accu Plant and Accu Rate page 372 New Leader Mark III and Mark IV page 372 Hardi 5500 6500 page 374 Tyler Flex Air page 374 Bogballe Calibrator Zurf page 375 Vaderstad Control Station page 375 Amazone Amatron page 375 LH Agro LH5000 page 376 The FmX integrated display can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time Note Before you can make any changes you must close all fields To use anon Trimble variable rate controller to operate a spray boom do the following 1 Install the non Trimble variable rate controller See page page 368 2 Enable the Serial Rate Control plugin See page page 369 3 Select the port for the variable rate controller See page 369 4 Configure the spray boom in the FmX integrated display See page page 369 5 Enable and configure the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display See page page 369 D Configure the variable rate controller See page page 371 7 Set any other features of the variable rate controller See page page 376 Installing a non Trimble variable rate controller Use the hardware provided with your variable rate controller to mount it in the vehicle cab To use a variable rate controller you must connect it to port A or B
44. Frequencies tab The list of current frequencies appears Advanced Logging Radar Output Settings Frequencies Vehicle Intemal Autonomous a Note Up to 19 different frequencies can be stored 3 To add a new frequency tap Add 4 Enter the required frequency for the next available channel and then tap OK The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 5 From the Wireless Mode drop down list select the appropriate mode and then tap OK FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 151 6 The GPS Receiver Enabling SecureRTK SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a Trimble RTK base station service provider to generate time based access codes for their supported rovers SecureRTK requires firmware version 1 59 or later on MS7 50 GPS receivers and firmware version 3 67 on AgRTK and AgGPS 442 base stations 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup Semings SecurerTx Logging Ragar Output Cancel Vehicle Internal Autonomous OK 2 Select the SecureRTK tab Cancel Vehicle Internal Autonomous OK 3 Inthe Key field enter the base station access code provided by your base station service provider The Status and Expiry fields change to show the current status of the security feature 152 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 4 Optional In the Description
45. Getting Started e Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your field For example you could put corn seed in the left side hoppers on your planter and clover seed in the right side hoppers and track where each set of seeds is planted The varieties are assigned to rows on your implement Specify the number of rows on your implement when you configure it For more information see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 To configure varieties from the Field Selection screen tap Hybrid Setup Tap To Add Add a new variety and select a name using the virtual keyboard Remove Select a variety name in the list and then tap Remove to delete it Edit Select a variety name in the list and then tap Edit to change the settings Change the color that will appear on the Run screen when you are applying this variety You can also select record keeping information 66 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Tap To Assign Assign varieties to segments of coverage logging Select the row numbers on your implement that will be applying each variety Do this for each variety you have added Clear Clear all current assignments Assignments When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping information tab drop down list to Variety this variety color appears in the guidance window See page 48 X Tip For quick access
46. Guide Data Management 23 Event folder Each Event folder stores e Coverage logging shapefiles that are recorded during the event called Coverage See Coverage logging data page 451 e Track logging shapefiles that are recorded during the event called Track3D_ lt date time gt The following figure shows how an vent folder and its files are organized BY t Agl PS Data Smith Farms Meadowbrook South Held Planting E My Doaments m Coverage sho 2KB ESRI Shapetiie E My Computer E Coverage shx 1KB SHX Fie lt gt Local Olek C Si Track30_2006 08 17 01_21_36_557 cof 2KD Date Base QD woaw Orive D A Track3D_ 2006 08 17 01_21_36_557 shp 1B ESRI Shapefie a Bd SanDisk imogeMote E F Tradd _2006 08 17 01_21_26_557 shx 1K8 SHX File AgGrs Track2D _2006 08 17 01_21_36_557 trx OKS TRX Fie Atunes S Track30_2006 08 17 01_22_20_199 cbf 2KB Data Base 9 EQ Autopilot Track30_2006 08 17 01_22_20_199 shp 1KB ESRI Shapefie a osta Track30_2006 08 17 01_22_20_199 shx LKB SHX File E E Smith Farms 5B Track3O_2006 08 17 01_22_20_199 tx OKB TRX Fie B Meadowbrook 5 Track30_2006 08 17 12_49_00_786 cbf 2KB DataBase a South Field a Traan 2006 08 17 12_49_00_786 shp 1KB ESRI Shapefie Q tenting Sf Treck20_2006 09 17 12_49_00_786 shx 10 SHX Pie Soreving Sf Track3_ 2006 08 17 12_49_00_786 trx 0S TRX file 5 Oogwstis gt Autopilot D Screenshots Frmnere Presenphans O Sumewes
47. Heading to Feature Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature feature is directly ahead 0 degree symbol directly behind 180 degrees Heading to Pause Impl Altitude Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position directly ahead 0 degree symbol directly behind 180 degrees The current height of the implement Impl CMR Percent The percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS receiver over the last 100 seconds Impl Correction Age Impl Correction Type The age of the corrections used by the implement receiver The correction type used by the implement receiver Impl East The distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the west of the field origin point Impl Engaged Time Impl GPS Status The time that the implement has been engaged The status of the GPS correction used for the implement Impl H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions Impl HDOP The Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better Impl Heading The current heading of the implement in degrees from direct north Impl Latitude The impleme
48. Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements e Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Control Setting Description Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 231 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 255 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each
49. In the Delete Data storage tabs select Internal Memory and then select Field Data from the list of available data types 6 Inthe Client Farm Field or Event drop down lists select the item to delete and then tap Delete 7 When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Deleting all of the data from the internal memory CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Tap Delete All Events or Delete Everything Bye JOU gee ee Tek A When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted Deleting selected data from the USB memory stick CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Select External USB Drive from the tabs and then select Field Data Select the item to delete from the Client Farm Field or Event list and then tap
50. In the Port Connection drop down list choose Connector A or Connector B In the Grain Flow Delay field enter the time in seconds that it takes the grain to travel from the header to the clean grain tank FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 401 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Select the Crop tab General m oomo ia In the Crop Type drop down list select the crop type In the Standard Moisture field enter a value In the Crop Weight field enter a value Select the Serial tab soe Parity None z Data Bits fs Stop Bits f Cancel OK In the Baud Rate field enter a value In the Parity field enter a value In the Data Bits field enter a value In the Stop Bits field enter a value Tap OK 402 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 YM2000 Step Action The following steps explain how to configure the YM2000 display to communicate with the FmX display 1 Press the SETUP key until LOGGING DEVICE NONE or EXT or M CARD appears on the display 2 Use the top UP or DOWN ARROW keys to set this to LOGGING DEVICE EXT Calibration Calibrating yield monitoring To calibrate moisture sensor and yield monitor on John Deere combine e 60 series combines use Greenstar Monitor see Original Greenstar Display 60 Series Combines page 410 e 70 series combines use the Command Center see Command Center 7
51. Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin Setting up the Field IQ system for Anhydrous As WARNING NH is an irritant and corrosive to the skin eyes respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly It may cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is 10 recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times Make sure that you have set your implement to Tillage or Spraying and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab See Material page 299 Layout page 301 Section Control page 302 Rate Control page 304 Sensors page 307 Operation page 308 Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup son Setting Description Material Type Material Name Select your Field IQ application type Anhydrous Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material FmX Integrated Display User Guide 299 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Anydrous Units Select the unit of measure
52. Mapping tab on the Run screen The features that you defined appear on the tab 2 Begin to drive the field 3 When you reach the point where you want to add a feature tap the appropriate feature button Ifthe feature is a Point Feature such as the Rock button in the example above the feature is added Ifthe feature is a Line Feature such as the 2in Tile button in the example above or an Area Feature such as the Water button the feature will begin Area and Line features continue until you tap the button a second time Note You can add a Point feature while adding a Line or Area feature For example use a Line feature to draw an overhead telephone wire and simultaneously use a Point feature to add the telephone poles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 63 3 Getting Started 64 Pausing guidance You can pause guidance and return to your position later To pause guidance from the Run screen tap rose When you tap Pause the following happens e Apause icon appears at the point where your vehicle was e The status text shows the distance and angle required to return to that point e Swath snapping occurs to the pause position it does not follow your vehicle e Your position is saved to a file on the display You can then close the field and turn off the display When you next open that field you will be guided back to your former position When you return to your former position tap Resume
53. Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 303 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Setting Description Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages Number of Nozzles Enter the number of spray nozzles on the
54. RUM SCLECM ise a 8a asses sete Geode ea ae BP Galea ea BIS in ned a a ed i 31 Zoom and Pan functions 1 2 ee eee 32 Context sensitive help 2 nnana ee ee eee 34 Installing the display 2 2 ee eee 35 Connecting the display 2 uaaa 37 Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket 2 0 0 eee ee ee 37 External lightbar s o sacs E e aana nent eee 38 3 GRIND Started cric ores eG Ce et ode paea ie es 39 Introduction to field features 2 eee 40 Starting a fields ssoi e ee She toe an eee nie ead ek hee Ee Pe ee eS 41 Creating a Chente s a a aabang baba were ee b bbe hake ale hob ee d de 42 Additional setting Sn eeo ick 44 ae RG RG a ee AE Ge Oe Ras 42 Closinga field 6 44 eden bad a ee boo ibd ee ba da de oe ae OS 44 Saving an event summary uuaa 44 The Run screen layout 2 ee eee 45 Selecting a swath pattern 6 ee 51 Creating a new Ney 2 nkepicias p68 ea nigias be eee Eade kG eee 53 The Record Dutton sisi ety ok a Mane eee de ee asd el gene wera AA aL re er 55 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 7 Contents 5 8 Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern 0 0 00 e eee 56 Loading a ities yssit ease Ket Ried os REERE OS OGD REE RE ETa a ia 59 Adding an access pathy esa aoa ace Save a bes oe Bn ee Oe eS 59 Swath management 2 ee eee 60 Using the Guide to tabs 6 cia Os dw ed ee ed Pa a ab gp tbe he es 62 Using Skip to fine tune navigation a oa sssaaa 62 Placing fie
55. SCNSOLs baa ed OEE Se RE ae ee Re ee 318 12 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 12 13 Contents Sensor mounting bracket ossaa 318 Care and maintenance s a cice ee dae bee eee ewe eee eee ee owe Eee eed 319 Field preparations for Nitrogen application 0 2 eee eee 319 Field informations 20k wa tinr ee te ORR eae ee Oe PS Raa RAER 319 Field getup m a sets ee BE kee Sage ee de oes ade Has ere ey Hee ae ates eTR 320 Field preparations for user definedrate 0 eee ee 321 Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin 1 ee ee eee 322 GreenSeeker plugin screen nuuanu 323 GreenSeeker diagnostics 1 eee 329 Application informations css e easy ed ade ee a eh ae eh ee ees 330 Delivery System and Liquid Control 0 0 000 330 Selecting a nozzle s aa kb edhe eA eS e gia aas atardi E eee he ed bes 331 BeSt practice sacha cae AD RAG GREP DD De GS BEES RRR ES 331 The TrueGuide Plugin 2 0 000 ee eee eee 333 Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0000 eee eee 334 Configuring the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0000 eee eee 335 TrueGuide implement setup 1 0 ee ee ee 335 Setting up the TrueGuide system 2 ee eee 336 Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system 0 000000 0008 337 Engaging and disengaging the TrueGuide system 0 0 00 eee 338 Operating the TrueGuide system 2 1 ee ee 339 TrueGuide system aggressive
56. Select 3 View page 2 Moisture Change Correction 3 0 Yield Monitor gt Jail Yield Mon Ene 4 Verify that the combine s grain tank and the truck wagon are both empty and tap Start Yield Calibration is Stopped Weight Ib FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 5 Harvest about 500 bushels and hit Stop Yield Calibration St is Running op Weight Ib 516 6 Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck wagon 7 Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck wagon in wet pounds Yield Calibration Start is Stopped Weight a lb 516 Change Command Center 70 Series Combines Calibrate Moisture 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Select lt 3 Press hee on the Command Center 4 Continue to press until page 2 appears page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab i 5 Inthe Calibrations list select Moisture 6 Follow the steps to perform the calibration Calibration e 9 7 Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 411 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Calibrate Yield 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Select Press on the Command Center we 4 Continue to press Sa until page 2 appears page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab 5 Inthe Calibr
57. Select Prescription screen For example a value of 5 0 means that on average it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate The lead time value is used by the FmX integrated display to project the position of the vehicle into the future The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller giving the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle arrives at the projected position You must choose an appropriate lead time This depends on the controller type and configuration the type of materials being applied and the nature and specifications of the delivery equipment Last default or zero rate When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file no target rate is available There are three options for controlling the output rate e Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription e Use a default rate e Use a zero rate Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen e Prescriptions can now be selected even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field enabling operators or managers to load a prescription before driving to the field FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup In this chapter m Accessing the system config
58. Test the current manual override setting a Turn the steering wheel The Override Inactive button changes color when the Override becomes active With the system active assess whether the manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for e Speed of steering wheel turn e Distance of steering wheel turn b To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting select the slider bar Move the slider bar as follows Slider bar direction Result Triggers manual override Left Increased sensitivity More easily Right Decreased sensitivity Less easily The value to the right of the slider shows the current setting The total range is 0 5 to 2 5 where 0 5 is the most sensitive setting and 2 5 is the least sensitive To try the new setting tap OK The Vehicle Calibration screen appears d Select Manual Override again The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen appears again e Repeat Steps b c and d to test each new setting XE Tip You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions f loading and or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system For example you can turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity f Tap OK to accept the new setting or tap Cancel to exit FmX Integrated Display User Guide 115 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Calibrating the AutoSense device 1 Select Autosense
59. Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module e Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module e Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes e On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance e Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds e Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area e End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swa
60. a field that has previously been measured with a laser The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match your previous laser system e Flat plane GPS Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system No corrections will be made to a flat plane so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the Earth This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field e Contour The system guides you around a contour The system indicates whether to drive up or down to maintain your current level This is designed for marking rice levees FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Terminology The FieldLevel II system uses the following terms Blade P A A cuveil A A Offset Blade Height A Target Height Design Height Item Description Blade Height The current height of the blade Design Height The height at the current location determined by the design plane Offset The difference between Design Height and Target Height Using the offset buttons creates a plane that is parallel to the original design Target Height The height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the height indicator arrow turns green Cut Fill The difference between the Blade Height and the Targe
61. a new client See Creating a client page 42 Select an existing client from the Client drop down list The Farm list now contains only the farms associated with that client Select the appropriate farm or create a new one Select the appropriate field or create a new one Select the appropriate event or create a new one To add more information for record keeping tap Event Attributes The Event Attributes screen appears See Adding record keeping information page 42 To add and edit information on the variety of products that can be distributed from the implement tap Hybrid Setup See Logging varieties page 65 Tap OK to enter the Run screen Once you create the field select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field See Selecting a swath pattern page 51 Creating a client L 2 Tap New beside the Client list and then use the virtual keyboard to enter a client name Repeat this process to create a farm field and event and record keeping Event Attributes if required Note You can also enter Client Farm Field and Event information using the Data Dictionary Data Dictionary page 95 Additional settings Limit Field Selection Filter When opening existing fields the FmX integrated display can limit the number of fields displayed based on a pre defined distance from the current GPS position For more information on configuring the filter see Enabling the Limit Field Selection filter page 98 Adding re
62. a percentage of the Application Width set in the FmX integrated display Implement Boom Setup screen For example if you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the application coverage by making the application width greater than the swath width This proportionally changes the recorded width of each boom section Using the controller To allow the rates being sent by the FmX integrated display to be used by the Raven controller the channel must be set to Rate 1 SCS4XX SCS6XX or to Product X Auto SCS7XX If the controller is set to Rate 2 or Manual the controller ignores the rates being sent but the display still records the applied rates Limitations Set the baud rate to 9600 Some older controllers are only capable of 1200 baud these controllers need to be upgraded CAUTION Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates If the target rate is zero and spray is still being applied you must turn off the boom sections manually Rawson and New Leader The Rawson and New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate Yield and a step size to describe rates Set the Default rate in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen to match the Yield value or nominal flow rate in the Rawson controller Any non zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select A rate of zero turns off the hydraulic drive Note For best result when creating prescriptions use rates in 2 4 or 6 7
63. accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better S Heading The current heading of the secondary blade in degrees from direct north S Latitude The secondary blade s current latitude S Longitude The secondary blade s current longitude S Network ID The RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver s corrections S North The distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point S Offset A separate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane S Offset X The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark S Offset Y The Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark S Satellites The number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver S Section Line Number The line number of the secondary blade S Speed The speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Target Height The height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height plus minus symbol the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green S Up S VDOP The height of the secondary blade receiver relative to the
64. along the section line Dist to Feature The distance to the nearest feature Dist to Pause The distance to the pause position East The distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin point Engaged Time The length of time that the system has been engaged Event Coverage Area The area that has been logged during the current event Event Coverage Distance The distance covered while logging during the current event Event Coverage Time The length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current event Event Name Name of the current event FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 79 4 Display Setup Free External Storage Item Description Farm Name Name of the current farm Field Area The field area within a pivot or headland boundary Field Name Name of the current field The amount of free space on the USB memory stick Free Internal Storage The amount of free space on the display s internal memory GMT Time The current Greenwich Mean Time GPS Position Spacing GPS Status The GPS correction type that the GPS receiver is currently using H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS position in 2 dimensions Heading The current heading of the vehicle in degrees from direct north
65. and articulated tractors To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidance the Autopilot system on the tractor must have a good calibration An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement guidance FmX Integrated Display User Guide 333 12 The TrueGuide Plugin Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system Once the TrueGuide implement guidance system has been professionally installed add the FmX integrated display as shown AN CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController Il harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble part number o A25 GNSS antenna x2 68040 00S 2 LMR400 65 extension cable 67473 Coaxial cable 68295 O Antenna 2822 10 5 Right angle cable 50499 O FmX power cable 66694 7 Basic power cable 67258 8 Main power bus cable 67259 Power adaptor cable 67095 10 NMO to TNC 20 antenna cable and base 62120 11 Main NavController II cable 54601 NavController II 55563 00 FmX integrated display 93100 02 14 FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 334 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Configuring the TrueGuide implem
66. angle measurement Note Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures You must ensure that you e Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Follow the instructions on each page e Run the engine at full throttle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 353 13 The TrueTracker Plugin e Raise the implement To run the steering sensor calibration 1 Select the Steering Angle procedure from the calibration list Implement Steering Sensor Calibration Q 2 Tap Start 3 Perform the calibration The value in the Volts field is updated as the wheels are steered Calibrating the Implement Automatic Deadzone The Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration procedure runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs AN WARNING During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the implement To avoid injury make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear In this test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs Notes on calibrating the Implement Automatic Deadzone e You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure See Calibrating the steering angle sensor page 116 e To ensure optimal s
67. associated with the field so if you close the field and then open it again the design reloads with the field With RTK GPS the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to reestablish the height FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Re establishing a benchmark If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark a large green circle is shown for 100 m 300 ft around the master benchmark flag This indicates that you need to rebench over the master benchmark location to ensure that the design is aligned with the previous position You must be within this circle before you are allowed to re establish the master benchmark To ensure that the design is properly aligned 1 Return exactly to the master benchmark location that you marked on the ground for example with flags see Benchmarks page 180 regardless of where your current on screen position appears to be 2 Re establish the benchmark This process is designed to accommodate RTK base station setup differences from the last time the field was open Importing control files from the Multiplane software Once you finish manipulating a topographic survey file in NPs MultiPlane you can export a control file GPS for use with
68. available to assign to each button depend on which plugins are activated on the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 427 20 The EZ Remote Joystick 428 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The LB25 External Lightbar In this chapter This chapter describes how to configure the LB25 external lightbar to operate with the FmX m Configuring the lightbar integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 429 21 The LB25 External Lightbar Configuring the lightbar 430 l 2 3 4 5 Connect the LB25 lightbar to port B on the rear of the FmX integrated display From the Home screen tap x In the Current Configurations screen tap Configure Select the System option and then tap Setup From the Display Setup screen select Lightbar and then tap Setup In the Light Bars Configuration screen the virtual lightbar from the FmX integrated display is shown along with any detected external lightbars Light Bars Configuration FmX Integrated Display User Guide The LB25 External Lightbar 21 6 Select an external lightbar and then tap Setup 7 Enter the required settings and then tap OK The Light Bars Configuration screen appears 8 Tap OK The external lightbar is now configured FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 431 21 The LB25 External Lightbar 432 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Advanced Configuration In this chapter Configuring remote
69. being applied FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 43 3 Getting Started Closing a field Once you finish using a field tap to close it The following dialog appears Tap To Cancel Return to the currently open field Close Close the current field and return to the Home screen Open another Close the current field and open a new field Saving an event summary When a field is closed the system saves an HTML summary for the event To reduce the time it takes to close a field saving the summary file can be disabled To turn Save Summaries off do the following 1 Inthe Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup 2 Inthe Display Setup screen select Map Settings and then tap Setup 3 In the Mapping screen select On or Off from the Save Summaries list For more information see Saving a PDF version of the current field page 437 44 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 The Run screen layout The Run screen is where you receive guidance and drive the vehicle The appearance of the screen changes depending on which plugins you have installed o _ m 0 Item Description 1 Virtual lightbar Tap the icon to access GPS receiver s information Plugin tabs Logging and engage buttons Plugin information tabs Run screen o 9 0 0 O View mode Zoom and Pan function and informat
70. close the field create a second field and then show the summary view the summary view may be zoomed to show the area of both fields To avoid this restart the display The view will be correct For more information on using the Run screen see The Run screen layout page 45 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 33 2 Display Overview Context sensitive help The FmX integrated display has context sensitive help screens that provide details and helpful information about the current screen To access the help tap 2 A Help screen similar to the one show below appears To exit the Help screen and return to the previous screen tap OK 34 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Installing the display Mount the FmX integrated display in the vehicle cab in a position that is easily accessible 1 Use the included M6 x 1 screws to firmly screw the mounting plate to the back of the display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 35 2 Display Overview 2 Attach the RAM mount to the ball on the mounting plate 3 Select a position in the cab for the display The FmX integrated display is mounted in the cab with a bar style RAM mount 4 Use the provided bolts to attach the bar mount to the rail 5 Hold the display in the selected location to ensure that it is comfortably accessible from the driver s seat 6 Attach the other end of the RAM mount to the ball on t
71. connector 6 m A CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble part number 1 FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 O Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 O 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 7 NavController II 55563 00 8 8m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 76442 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 0058 Main NavController II cable 54601 11 DCM 300 to display cable 82033 DCM 300 cellular antenna 72122 51227 DCM 300 modem 83x00 10 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 417 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 418 Unlocking the DCM 300 modem with passcodes The DCM 300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS File Transfer The VRS File Transfer functionality in the DCM 300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data transfer To unlock the DCM 300 with a passcode you must connect the modem to the FmX display and then turn it on The Unlock screen shows the DCM 300 when connected enter the passcode in the FmX display and then tap OK to sen
72. controller Vehicle profile database file As additional profiles become available or are updated they are added to a vehicle profile database You can download the database and load profiles from it Saved file You can install an individual vehicle profile that you have previously saved 2 Inthe Vehicle Profile Location group select the source for the make and model Tap this button See Then go to step From Controller new Selecting a new vehicle make and model from the list on 3 the Autopilot controller From Database new Selecting a new vehicle make and model from a 4 database of vehicles vdb on the FmX integrated display If you need to obtain a vdb file contact your local reseller From Saved File Selecting a saved vehicle make and model from the 5 existing display cfg on the card Selecting a new vehicle make and model from the list on the Autopilot controller a From the drop down list select From Controller New b Tap the Model drop down box and then select the make and model that you require from the list Selecting a new vehicle make and model from a database a From the drop down list select From Database new and then tap Browse b Select the vdb file that you want to open and then tap OK Selecting a saved vehicle make and model from the display From the drop down list select From Saved File existing and then tap Browse b Select the required
73. display s screen guides you onto the design profile Note Specifically for the Autoslope leveling model P Boot Depth shows the depth of the tile boot or the blade for ditching applications and P Design Slope shows the current slope that the tile or ditch is being installed to See FieldLevel II status text items page 197 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 207 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Driving in Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes When driving in Flat Plane mode the Laser and GPS options operate the same The Flat Plane Laser model results in a mathematically flat surface This means that the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth but remains on a plane Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system and you want to touch up the field The Flat Plane GPS model results in an equipotential surface meaning that the design surface is curved with surface of the Earth Note Neither of these models can be used with a laser system the entire FieldLevel II system only works with GPS Tap To Design enter the Plane Editor where you can edit the Design plane Bench or Rebench create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 180 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Down Arrow raise the blade by the Blade Step amount Up Arrow lower the blade by the Blade Step amount Auto engage automatic blade height control e starts
74. distance Offset direction Total Total 3 Average offset value 12 Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Entering the roll offset 1 Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset field See Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction page 124 2 Select one of the offline direction options depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 1 Select Line Acquisition from the calibration list See page 111 2 Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider The slider controls how aggressively the vehicle approaches the guidance line using a scale from 50 to 150 The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100 it varies for different vehicle profiles Note When you adjust the slider check the vehicle stability at the speed shown 4 5 mph in the example above or at the maximum engage speed 128 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating a tracked tractor If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model the Track Spacing option appears on the calibration list This option is not shown in the Vehicle Controller Setup screen shown on page 112 Track Spacing value Use this option to configure the width of the tracks on the vehicle The width of the vehicle tracks is the distance fro
75. down list 2 Tap the required item from the list The drop down list disappears and the selected item appears in the field Slider bars Slider bars appear on several of the configuration screens Aslider bar shows how extreme a selection is Ifyou use a slider bar to select the value it is apparent that you are nearing the extreme value FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 There are two ways to use a slider bar e To move up by one increment tap on the slider bar in the direction that you want to move the pointer e To slide the pointer a Touch the screen where the pointer is located and hold your finger on the screen b Move your finger along the axis in the direction that you want to move the pointer c Remove your finger when you are satisfied with the position of the pointer Lists Available Prescriptions A list shows all the available options To select an item from a list tap the item ene The FmX integrated display stores data in a folder hierarchy according to client farm field and event Folder hierarchy Item Description Client The customer for whom the work is being done Farm A collection of fields see below Field A specific area of land where events are carried out A field can be created on the display to represent an actual field part of an actual field or a group of more than one actual fields Event A precision agri
76. e Radio antenna RTK only Item Description 1 FmX integrated display 2 RAM mount and screws 20 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Front view Trimble Item Description 1 12 touch sensitive screen In the field the easiest way to interact with the system is to tap the touch sensitive screen with your finger CAUTION Do not press on the screen with a sharp item such as a pencil you may damage the surface of the screen FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 21 2 Display Overview Rear view Item Description Power button Brightness controls USB socket Backup battery housing Power connection socket Primary GPS connector Secondary GPS connector RTK antenna connector CAN communication sockets A B 0 0 0 O 0 Serial communication sockets C D Power button To turn the display on or off press and hold the power button for approximately 0 5 seconds Brightness controls To increase or decrease the brightness of the FmX integrated display press the corresponding button 22 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 USB socket You can connect a USB memory stick to the display to transfer data to and from the unit Power connection socket Connects the power cable P N 66694 to the display Primary
77. e aha wate E eo alee a ee ae wade be a ee 171 Entering the password to activate a plugin 2 ee eee 171 The FieldLevel II Plugins 1 2 ee 175 FieldLevel Survey Design plugin nosna ee eee 176 Description lt asa a a Ge es ee a dS ee Be ee Oe Ree ge eek Rade ee 176 Terminology nie 220058 wee KSA G Oe ee ee GS Oh he ae aS 176 Benefits of the FieldLevel II system 0 0 0 cee eee eee 177 Requirements of the FieldLevel IIsystem 0 0 00 e eee ee ee 177 Inistallahion s 4 46 Paks wha ee a dal Oe wee Ow Ge eae eae oa 177 Config ralo a wssas pra baa ee Sed AS eae Geo SG PE es 178 Configuring the implement forleveling 0 0 0 0 0000000008 179 Operating the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin 0 0 0 00 00 e eee eee 180 RUN SCICCH sais 4k OE RU ee a Ad Rae a wae oon A se 180 Creating a SUIVeY e se 65 She ala Se ee OES Ra Ee Owe a a ole wi aS 180 Field Gesigii ss e suie leh how RR BGs PU des ER WAG Pe E eh Oh ee Rl e i 185 Options on the scr en occse cii bb ee Oka ee ee Ea ee eed 185 Creating w d Sign 9 4 9 4 cpa ah ba es aed poe ea Pe ee a He el ee ee 187 Saving thenew design oes 4000s e kee elev dave See ed cei anes See Lowa 187 Reloading a field s s ged esaek a Ge ik Meee ee Bas We Ae gt 188 Fieldl velill plisimis 5 0 saath tad kaw eA edad wee OSE eh Oe Ee kes 188 MultiPlane designs 1 pobos a sads i ah i ai a aeia aak eee 188 Leveling models eseina eee E KOREA GaP RR e A Ra 188 TETN Oii s
78. field enter the name of the base station 5 Tap OK If SecureRTK is enabled on the base station rovers with authorized access codes can use corrections from that base Note Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station Autoseed fast restart technology Autoseed fast restart technology greatly reduces the time needed for OmniSTAR HP XP VBS convergence Once the OmniSTAR signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown To benefit from Autoseed technology e you must use OmniSTAR HP or XP corrections e shut down the receiver e do not move the vehicle before you turn on the receiver again e the GPS receiver must have a clear view of the sky Note Vehicle movement will result in unsatisfactory performance including longer convergence times and positional offsets To enable the Autoseed technology 1 On the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 2 In the Corrections drop down list select either OmniSTAR HP XP or OmniSTAR HP XP VBS The Autoseed button becomes available 3 Select Autoseed and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 153 6 The GPS Receiver Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software The FmX integrated display has a virtual AgRemote interf
79. field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better S Vertical Error Estimate The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver FmX Integrated Display User Guide 83 4 Display Setup Item Description Satellites The number of satellites the system is currently receiving Secondary Pressure The current pressure as reported by the secondary pressure sensor Section Line Number Seed Mults The number of the current section line The percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every intended drop Seed Population The amount of seed planted per acre hectare Seed Singulation The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop Seed Skips The percentage of seed that has not been planted Seed Spacing The percentage of seed that has been applied in the specified spacing Session Coverage Area The area that has been logged during the current session Session Coverage Dist The distance covered while logging during the current session Session Coverage Time The length of time that coverage logging has been e
80. file and then tap OK c Select Change Vehicle to save the new settings The following message appears The specified vehicle model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset Do you want to continue Note If you select a vehicle make and model but do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot controller that make and model will not be loaded 110 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 3 Tap OK to load the new configuration The following message appears The Autopilot controller will now be reinitialized in order to complete the vehicle selection 4 Tap OK The file is now loaded For more information on saving vehicle profiles on the FmX integrated display see Saving a vehicle profile page 131 Autopilot calibration Once you configure the vehicle make and model calibrate the system for your individual vehicle The Autopilot system calibration process records additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the vehicle more accurately For high accuracy systems you must have all the settings correct The vehicle calibration screen tools are similar to those in the Autopilot Toolbox II software Notes on calibration e Before you perform vehicle calibration select the vehicle make and model on the Vehicle Setup screen See Selecting the vehicle page 109 e No calibration is required if the system is installe
81. following 1 If past practice was a 100 pre plant application of N decrease pre plant N application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total N applied during non GreenSeeker management practice For spring or winter wheat if application rate has historically been 100 lbs N acre decrease the rate to 50 lbs N acre For corn if application rates have historically been 200 lbs N acre decrease to 75 to 125 lbs N acre For corn or wheat be aware that a sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 2 Prior to or shortly after planting establish the NRS Nitrogen Rich Strip in a representative portion of the field i e not in a historically high spot or low spot and then apply an applicators width swath of N The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy crop N needs in a good year For spring or winter wheat the N rate should be at least 100 Ibs N acre For corn the N rate should be at least 200lbs N acre Keep in mind that a sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area 3 Make certain to use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A B line
82. from the Provide Guidance to drop down list and then tap OK Swath management Several options are available on the Swath Management screen You can delete swaths rename swaths or shift them to the left or right To access these features select the Swaths tab You cannot delete rename or shift line features or FreeForm curves 60 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Deleting a swath To be able to delete swaths you must have entered the Administration password 1 From the Run screen tap the Swath button The Swath Management screen appears 2 From the list on the left select the swath to delete 3 Tap Delete If prompted enter the password The swath is marked as deleted The next time that you close the field the swath is removed from the list Note You cannot delete a swath that is currently active Renaming a swath To be able to rename swaths you must have entered the Administration password 1 From the Run screen tap the Swath button The Swath Management screen appears 2 From the list on the left select the swath to rename 3 Tap Rename If prompted enter the password The Enter new swath name screen appears 4 Enter the new name for the swath and then tap OK The swath is renamed Shifting a swath 1l From the Swath Management screen select the swath to shift from the list on the left 2 Tap Shift The Enter the Shift Distance screen appears 3 Select the correct unit
83. full the system turns the seed disks one revolution Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch In the Number of Seed Meter Revolutions enter a value and then tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Trimble recommends 5 to 10 revolutions Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system turns the specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue 290 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 6 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set 7 Tap OK 8 Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration Hydraulic test The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system 1l From the Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test A CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 2 Tap Next 3 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 Trimble also recommends that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 4 Tap Start FmX Int
84. guidance line Each LED on the second lightbar represents 1 inch Implement GPS information button Tap the implement GPS information button to view extra implement receiver status information Tap OK to return to the Run screen Implement status text items A number of status text items provide information about the implement For more information see Status items page 77 You can set these status text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or ona slide out tab To view the following items tap the corrections status button at the top right of the screen Implement GPS Status Implement Correction Type Implement Correction Age Latitude Longitude Altitude Satellites HDOP VDOP Network ID FmX Integrated Display User Guide 365 13 366 The TrueTracker Plugin Implement tab When the TrueTracker plugin is installed the TrueTracker tab becomes available on the main Run screen a E He Chea The TrueTracker tab enables you to adjust the implement steering independently of the vehicle steering For example if you can see that the implement is consistently to one side of the guidance line but the vehicle is correctly online you can apply Trim to the implement to correct it When turned on Zero Steering commands the steering to zero degrees left right centering the steering device on the implement This option can be turned on in the field keeping the coulters pointed straight
85. if you are harvesting If you are not harvesting the average grain moisture is displayed Note You can select this in a manual moisture mode 406 Fm lt X Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Yield Status screen item Description Instant yield Displays the dry yield in bushels per acre If you are harvesting the instantaneous yield is displayed and will change every second If you are not harvesting the average yield is displayed Wet weight per bin and per field Displays the estimated wet weight in metric tonnes pounds or imperial tons of grain Error messages Error message Cause Resolution State 1 During boot up 60 Series e Moisture unit e Head unit e Armrest unit 70 Series e Moisture sensor e CC1 unit e Cab unit e Corner post YM 2000 e Cannot detect YM 2000 e Serial port Ensure that the correct cable is installed Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B is there another value other than zero for CAN messages 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX has been changed 70 Series Combines Change the Crop Type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FmX integrated display Raise the head up or down to see if the display will show a change for header height If Step 1 and
86. is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field JQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 273 10 The Field IQ Plugin 274 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 2 3 4 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option Raise the implement and then tap Next Lower the implement and then tap Next Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the spraying modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rate and Section control module installed l 2 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Rate and Section Control Module to calibrate Field IQ Calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above FmxX Integra
87. mA this signal controls the device that requires the remote output The relay is grounded to pin 10 of the display s B port Signal out to device Configuring the Remote Output plugin When remote output is activated the FmX integrated display sends pulses to an external device For example you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter Note Pulse output occurs only when coverage logging is enabled To enable pulse remote output 1 Install the Remote Output plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 170 2 From the Configuration screen select the Remote Output plugin and then tap Setup 380 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Remote Output Plugin 15 The Remote Output screen appears Remote Output Connector Daviea om a 3 From the Remote Output Connector drop down list select Connector B The default option is Disabled More options appear Remote Output Connector 8 d Remote Output Type Based Pulse 4 Duration 100 00 ms Time 10 008 Within Distance ag FmX Integrated Display User Guide 381 15 The Remote Output Plugin 4 From the Remote Output Type drop down list select one of the following If you select Then enter Time Based Pulse the pulse interval in seconds in the Time field the pulse duration in milliseconds in the Duration field Distance Based Pulse the Lead Time See Calibrating the lead time for your implemen
88. measure and keyboard layout page 88 Display units Select for Metric tonnes per hectare Feet and inches bushels per acre Decimal feet tons per acre Note For hundred weight select Feet and Inches and then set the bushel weight to 100lbs General tab Field name Yield monitor type Description Select the type of monitor that will be gathering and sending the yield data Combine series Indentify sensor type and communication protocol Port Connection Connection of sensors to FmX integrated display Stop Head Height Sensor that reads the header height value that defines the logging start and stop Grain Flow Delay Compensates where crop is processed in comparison to where it was harvested Crop Field Name Description Crop Type Identifies the crop being harvested and sets the default moisture and test weight Standard Moisture Calculates dry weight Crop Weight Calculates weight to bushels lbs or kg Crop weights Crop Bushel weight Ibs Dry moisture Alfalfa 60 0 14 0 Barley 48 0 14 0 Canola 60 0 10 0 Chick peas 60 0 12 0 Corn 56 0 15 5 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 397 18 398 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Crop Bushel weight Ibs Dry moisture Edible b
89. of the Run screen FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 Forcing the system to turn off A CAUTION Do not do this unless absolutely necessary If the display is writing to the USB memory stick this method of shutting down the system could corrupt the data on the card If possible use one of the other shutdown methods See Turning off the display page 28 If the display stops responding hold down the Power button for 10 seconds to force the system to turn off FmX Integrated Display User Guide 473 24 Troubleshooting 474 FmX Integrated Display User Guide
90. on Following this the Status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus Expect to see a brief green flash followed by a red flash at the I M message rate typically at 0 5sec this indicates that data from the left green flash and right red flash CAN ports is being transmitted 2 Install the GreenSeeker plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 3 From the Home screen load the field to be sprayed FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker plugin screen The control items in the GreenSeeker tab on the Run screen depend on what you previously selected for example a crop algorithm or a custom table The Calibration Required message appears when a new job event is first opened and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected Note If you want to use a custom table but see this screen tap Edit and then follow the custom table instructions found in the FmX Integrated Display User Guide If a custom table has been previously selected the Calibration Required message will not display 1 From the Run screen select the GreenSeeker plugin tab 2 Tap Calibrate The GreenSeeker plugin tab now includes Ref and Non Ref buttons along with a NDVI bar graph showing the real time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module 3 Position the vehicle at the reference locations 4 To record NDVI data from the referen
91. optional remote engage foot pedal or rocker switch To disengage the systems do one of the following e Tap the Engage button on the main guidance screen e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal or rocker switch e Turn the steering wheel The system automatically disengages when e The vehicle or implement is outside the engage limits e GPS positions are lost on the implement or on the vehicle e Minimum Fix Quality is not maintained and the system receives low accuracy positions for example no corrections FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Engage status indicators Engage status Button color Vehicle icon color ees 9 A me s D ae Operating the TrueGuide system 1 Inthe Run screen with the TrueGuide tab showing tap AUTO The TrueGuide system status is shown as Disengaged FmX Integrated Display User Guide 339 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 2 Tap Engage to start guidance The Auto button changes to ON and the TrueGuide system status is shown as Waiting The Autopilot system acquires the line before transistioning to the TrueGuide system The TrueGuide system status remains at Waiting while the Autopilot system acquires the line Once the TrueGuide system has taken control the TrueGuide System status changes to ON and the TrueGuide system Engage button changes to Auto 3 To disengage the TrueGuide system at any t
92. or flag on the FmX integrated display The ideal NRS would run the length of the field but it should at least be 400 feet long 4 At appropriate crop growth stage take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet to be fertilized For most supplied algorithms the following is typical Wheat Feekes growth stage 4 6 Corn V8 V12 5 Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the field this indicates greatest potential for the crop 6 Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop Algorithm 7 Be sure to match nozzles and or rate control system to maximize response time and performance for each field s requirements For more information see Delivery System and Liquid Control page 330 for more details and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable Field preparations for user defined rate The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than Nitrogen The GreenSeeker plugin for the FmX integrated display permits a custom algorithm to be entered which is a table of product values versus the NDVI value These values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table see Defining a Custom Table page 327 Note The values in the table are only an example the grower consultant must develop these rates Also be aware of the rate range ability of your specific rate controlle
93. page 360 Select one of the offline direction options depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 1 Select Line Acquisition from the calibration list Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line using a scale from 50 to 150 The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100 it varies for different implement profiles FmX Integrated Display User Guide 363 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Using the TrueTracker system When you have configured the TrueTracker plugin you can begin driving in the field with implement steering Main guidance screen The FmxX integrated display s main guidance screen changes when implement steering is enabled 9909009009000000 a a Item Description See page C1 Implement lightbar 364 2 Implement GPS information button 365 Implement status text items hidden 365 O Implement tab 366 Implement steering engage button 351 Implement lightbar When implement steering is enabled a second smaller lightbar appears below the main lightbar 898000000000000000000000000000000 OO ce BS wBmoOo Secondary lightbar 364 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 This lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the
94. point The GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently using PH Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions P HDOP The Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better P Heading The current heading of the primary blade in degrees from direct north P Latitude The primary blade s current latitude P Longitude The primary blade s current longitude P Network ID The RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver s corrections P North The distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point P Offset A separate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane P Offset X The Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark P Offset Y The Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark P Satellites The number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver P Section Line Number The line number of the primary blade P Speed P Target Height The speed of the vehi
95. port settings Productivity Monitoring Setup Go 5 Inthe Enalta list select Enable Enalta CCT to enable the Enalta system 6 Select the NMEA messages that the systems will use to communicate You can select GGA Select Enable GGA VTG Select Enable VTG GGA and VTG messages Select both buttons RMC 7 Enter the following settings Item Description Logging Rate While Field Open The rate at which data is logged when a field is open 1 sec 300 sec Logging Rate While Field The rate at which data is logged when the field is closed 1 sec 300 sec Closed Minimum Operating Speed When a field is open and the vehicle speed drops below this speed a pop up message appears onscreen asking the driver to select a reason for the low speed The system will not operate until the driver selects a reason Maximum Stoppage Time When a field is open and the vehicle stops moving for longer than this time the system prompts the driver for reason for the stoppage The system will not operate until the driver responds Productive When The system is marked productive when a condition is active e None The system is not productive e Logging On productive Off non productive e AP Engaged Engaged productive Disengaged non productive e Minimum Speed Above productive Below non productive FmX Integrated Display User Guide 391 17 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin Operatio
96. prescription file Note Ifan Aginfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format it does not appear in the Available Prescriptions list 4 Ifyou select a shapefile prescription you must select the correct prescription rate column CAUTION When you select a shapefile prescription if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller the applied rate will be incorrect If you select an AgInfo GDX prescription the Rate Column box does not appear 5 Set the prescription scale factor Selecting Prescription Scale Factor will give a list of scale factors for certain units Select the scale factor for whatever units are used in the prescription file 6 Set the lead time See below 7 Inthe When off prescription use list select the target rate for when you are outside the area that is covered by the prescription file See Last default or zero rate page 70 8 Tap OK to load the prescription file A prescription works only when the Field IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position If the switch is in the Rate 1 position the Increment Decrement switch is disabled If the Rate switch is in the Rate 2 position the prescription is disabled but the Increment Decrement switch does work FmX Integrated Display User Guide 69 3 Getting Started 70 Controller lead time Lead time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate change This value can be defined in the
97. rate applied by the rate control system when serial rate control TAC or Field IQ are used NDVI The NDVI values recorded when using the GreenSeeker plugin Note Not currently implemented Total_Qty Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the Aerial Flow Controller Autocal Flow controller and Crophawk Flow Meter Relative_Height Height meters Event History file The EventHistory dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field Data Description Version FmX integrated display firmware version Client Client name Farm Farm name Field Field name Event Event name Operator Operator name Material Material name Date open Date the field was opened Time open Time the field was opened Date close Date the field was closed Time close Time the field was closed Duration Length of time that the field was open seconds FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Data Description PrimaryAB Number of the primary AB Line ABLine Cover area Area covered Cover distance Distance covered 4 Cover time Engage time Time engaged Features files When features are recorded in the field each type of feature is saved in three feature shapefiles in the Field folder as follows These features Are saved in these files Point PointFeature J Line LineFeature
98. releases and makes commercially available and for which it does not charge separately subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products generally If you have purchased the Product from an authorized Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly Trimble may at its option forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final distribution to you Minor Updates Major Upgrades new products or substantially new software releases as identified by Trimble are expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to extend the limited warranty period For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply 1 Fix es means an error correction or other update created to fix a previous software version that does not substantially conform to its Trimble specifications 2 Minor Update occurs when enhancements are made to current features in a software program and 3 Major Upgrade occurs when significant new features are added to software or when a new product containing new features replaces the further development of a current product line Trimble reserves the right to determine in its sole discretion what constitutes a Fix Minor Update or Major Upgrade This Trimble software contains Qt 4 5 libraries licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL The source is available from http qt nokia co
99. secondary GPS connector Connects the GPS cable P N 50449 to the display RTK connector Connects the RTK cable P N 62120 to the display Serial CAN sockets Connects external devices to the display For example you can use these sockets to attach devices like AgCam cameras System software The FmX integrated display includes the following features e Field definition and mapping e Feature mapping e Guidance to predefined field patterns e Logging of coverage data e Variable rate control e Boom Row switching e Logging of topographic mapping data e Output of information for analysis in office based Geographic Information System GIS software e Seed Liquid Granular and Anhydrous Ammonia control e Seed monitoring FmX Integrated Display User Guide 23 2 24 Display Overview Control buttons On the displays Home screen and Run screen there are three touch sensitive buttons on the right side Press this button To ty a Exit the current screen Access the Configuration screen see page 30 via the Current Configurations screen U Access the Run screen see page 31 via the Configuration Selection screen Touch screen elements The following interactive features appear on the touch screen Virtual buttons Virtual keyboard Virtual number pad Drop down boxes Slider bars Lists For more information see Slide out tabs in Status items page 79 Virtual button
100. switch 1 Connect pin A of the switch to pin 10 of the 12 pin Deutsch connector on Port A or Port B of the display 2 Connect pin B of the switch to pin 11 of the 12 pin Deutsch connector on Port A or Port B of the display Doing this results in the connection being made between pins 10 and 11 of Port A or B of the display when the implement is raised or lowered Notes If Ports A or B are used by other cabling you can use the port replicator on the cable to connect the remote logging switch Ifyou use a different switch the connections may be different than described in this example FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 A relay must be used to control coverage logging when voltage is present at the switch The following schematic shows the relay between the display and the switch Battery For more information on configuring the implement see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 Enable the external switch To enable the external switch Tap Configure Qo se w YP Item Select the Extras tab From the Home screen tap A Select the implement and then tap Setup In the Remote Log Switch list select either Connector A or Connector B In the Logging When list select either High or Low Description Logging when high The system records logging when the switch is turned on and stops recording when the switch is turned off Logging when low The sys
101. the FmX integrated display m Installing the Field IQ hardware m Field lQ master switch box functions m Field IQ 12 section switch box optional m General setup information m Linking materials m Setting up the Field IQ system for Planting m Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding m Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying m Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading m Setting up the Field IQ system for Anhydrous m Using the Diagnostics tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 223 10 The Field IQ Plugin Introduction When the Field IQ plugin is installed the FmX integrated display can control planters sprayers air seeders liquid strip till tool bars and spinner spreaders It can perform automatic section control using Tru Count air clutches boom valves LiquiBlock and various section control devices while also controlling rates using a prescription with Rawson drives servo valves PWM valves and various flow control devices This chapter explains how to configure and use the Field IQ plugin Different functions of the plugin can be configured and controlled by Field IQ as follows Application Main functions Planter e Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual rows Field IQ section control module s needed using Tru Count air clutches e Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change seed population e Seed Rate control using up to 4 PWM drives to change seed popul
102. the FmxX integrated display firmware 438 1 Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your office computer 2 Connect the FmX integrated display USB memory stick to your office computer 3 Unzip the firmware file and then save it to the root folder of the USB memory stick 4 Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket on the rear of the FmX integrated display 5 Press the Power button on the rear of the display to turn on the FmX integrated display and then wait for the Home screen to appear 6 Tap Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen appears 7 Select a firmware file from the Firmware list and tap Upgrade 8 Once the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 Upgrading the Field IQ system firmware You can use the display to upgrade the firmware in the following components Plugin Item Field IQ Master Switch Box 12 Section Switch Box Rate and Section Control Module Seed Monitoring Module Section Control Module Rate Control Module Rawson Control Module To upgrade a component s firmware L 2 3 4 5 9 Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your office computer Connect the FmX integrated display USB memory stick to your office computer Copy the firmware upgrade file to the Firmware folder on the USB memory stick Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket on the FmX integ
103. the TrueTracker implement controller is connected to For the Current Selection list tap Edit to change the vehicle profile location and implement model see Configuring the implement make and model page 349 From the Vehicle Color list select the color you wish your vehicle to appear on the display screen Select the Engage tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the Engage tab 1 Inthe Engage tab adjust the Operator Alert Timeout value The alert appears if the operator does not respond within the defined period of time If the operator still fails to respond the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop 2 Set the Two Stage Engage status Item Description On Off The Engage button requires multiple taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and vehicle steering e The second tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering In the Coverage Log list select either Manual or When Engaged 4 Select the Steering tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 347 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 348 Configuring the Steering tab In the Steering tab enter a value in the Nudge Increment field Use this increment to set the amount by which the Nudge button
104. the curve is within the snapping zone Recording FreeForm guidance simultaneously with coverage When you select the FreeForm pattern on the Swaths Management screen you can select the When Logging option from the Record Swath drop down list When this option is selected the system activates FreeForm logging whenever coverage is being logged You can simultaneously turn on or off coverage and FreeForm logging with the Logging button on the Run screen Or if you have an external remote logging switch that controls coverage logging the system records FreeForm curves when the remote logging switch is enabled the remote switch turns on coverage which begins FreeForm logging However if a Field IQ system is connected the master switch on the Field IQ controller now controls FreeForm logging and not coverage itself Note Coverage switching will not create large numbers of short FreeForm sections FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Loading a line To load a line that you previously created in this field 1 From the Run screen tap the Swaths button The Swath Management screen appears 2 Doone of the following To load a straight section select the appropriate section from the list on the left of the screen To load aFreeForm curve select a curve from the list on the left of the screen The system loads the closest line to you 3 Tap Load The Run screen appears with the line loaded
105. the direction of the Cross Slope tap Flip This changes the Cross Heading between 90 and 270 from the Primary Heading 8 The plane is now defined Tap OK The Run screen appears Note The FieldLevel II plugin searches for a survey on the field If there is a survey a Cut Fill map appears on the new design plane 210 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Defining a plane using multiple benchmarks You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements If multiple benchmarks are created you can design a plane of best fit through those points If you use three benchmarks to design the plane then the cut and fill values will be 0 0 through those points as the plugin can create a perfect plane If you use more than three benchmarks to design the plane the cut fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best fit and the benchmark elevations To define a plane using multiple points do the following L From the Run screen select the Survey Design plugin and then create two or more benchmarks to help define the plane If a primary heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks If all the slopes of a field are to be defined then you need at least three benchmarks Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap the Design button The Plane Editor screen appears Tap New Plane Benchmark 2 From the Benchmarks list select the bench
106. the front back offset l 2 3 Create a straight AB Line In the Remote Output plugin set the Lead Time to 0 Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the line from point B to point A marking another set of trigger points Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Adjust your Front Back Offset value by this amount Ifthe return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points increase the F B offset Ifthe return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points lower the F B offset Setting the lead time L Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers Ensure that your speed remains constant At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the line from point B to point A marking the trigger points FmX Integrated Display User Guide 383 15 384 The Remote Output Plugin Measure any offset distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Convert your speed from mph to inches second inches second mph x 17 6 To
107. the lightbar 2 2 2 ee ene 430 Advanced Configuration 0 000 eee eee eee 433 Configuring remote coverage logging 1 ee ee 434 Installing the logging option 2 eee 434 Enable the external switchs a soi a sae eaa sea ei ea a E eee 435 Changing the password 2 eee eee 436 Locking the display to re enable the password 0000 ee eens 436 Saving the vehicle configuration 2 ee ene 436 Saving a PDF version of the current field 0 0 cee eee eee 437 Upgrading the FmX integrated display firmware 0 0 00 e eee ee eee 438 Upgrading the Field IQ system firmware 1 2 eee ees 439 Unlocking additional devices o an saaa eee 440 Data Management lt iac 2 tania saninin isi iii 441 Transferring data to an office computer ssaa 442 Data formats ss etea Seok otis 4 Se ee ain Gk OA RR E R E e 442 Editing Hes 2424 whos ob bao ae toe eR oon dee ee hd hb op bw ahd oh aed 443 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 15 Contents 24 16 Generating files in the office nnan eee 443 Folders on the USB memory stick 2 ee eee 444 The AgGGPS folder n e icc seks oad aie ek een aoa Bw OEE he es Bw a aa 445 Client folder s 05 tse eve aeed fae baal ote so ae wk peed ee a ale boa 446 Farm folder oss 6a de Aba Cie ee k gd ha ee ooh ak wad eer EOE EOR ee ee 447 Field folder ini 5 0008 a GSMS G Ow de a E GE OE be Eke ae bil BAKKE 447 Event folder nse ydio e fale BO ce A Ow We a
108. the steering sensor calibration has been performed Press Next Deadzone Left 240 Deadzone Right 240 ey lx 3 Tap Next FmX Integrated Display User Guide 119 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 4 Tap Next in the two screens that appear 5 Follow all instructions Tap the Test Right and Test Left buttons to perform the Deadzone calibration As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration Trimble recommends that you perform the calibration at least three times or until the average deadzone values change by less than about 0 5 To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration you can reposition the vehicle between the phases of the test If the available flat smooth space is extremely limited re align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration To reposition the vehicle 1 Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin 2 Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn 3 Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available 4 Tap the button to begin the next phase N CAUTION Obstacles in the field can cause collisions which may injure you and damage the vehicle If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue a particular phase of the Automated Deadzone calibration stop the vehicle to abort the phase and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system Reposition
109. the vehicle and continue from the current test phase Automated Deadzone error messages If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully one of the following error messages appears 120 Message Error Manual Override Detected Error Vehicle Moving Too Slow Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle could be completed Retry The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration cycle to successfully finish Make sure the vehicle is moving at least 0 8 kph 0 5 mph during each calibration cycle Error Steering Close To End Stops Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering angle approached the end stops Retry and if the problem persists instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Error Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected Retry and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly Error No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure Error No Steering Response Detected During the calibration cycle insuf
110. to the Hybrid Setup screen from the Run screen set the Mapping information tab drop down list to Variety and then tap Attributes If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement the variety assignments are removed Prescriptions You can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received from the controller and both target and applied rates appear on the screen In addition you can log data relating to the variable rate application to the card The FmX integrated display can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information System GIS The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use Once you create the prescription store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape file format or the single gdx file in the AgGPS Prescriptions folder Then when you are within the proximity criteria the prescription is available to load When you map a new field or select an existing field you can also select any shapefile shp or AgInfo GDX gdx prescription file created in Aginfo version 3 5 44 0 or later that is within the following limits For this type of field Prescriptions must Boundary Overlap the field boundary AB Line Overlap the AB Line P
111. values Decrease the slew time and increase the Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot This provides rapid responses but can overshoot This improves the stability but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability introduce significant delays in the steering for example a tendency to excessively response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate overshoot from side to side Notes on performing the proportional steering gain calibration e Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Perform this calibration on a hard level surface that is free of obstructions e Maintain a vehicle speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph while you perform the calibration Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is required e Overshoot exceeds 5 8 depending on the vehicle e Wheels noticeably shake near end stops FmX Integrated Display User Guide 121 5 Vehicle Guidance Options To calibrate the proportional steering gain 1 Select the Valve P gain procedure from the calibration list See Autopilot calibration page 111 The first Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration screen appears Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration _ _ O 2 Tap Run Slew Test A warning message appears 3 Tap Next A C
112. wath Se ee ei ae Seren 407 Third party display instructions 1 2 ee eee 409 Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Greenstar Monitor 409 Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Command Center 409 CalibratlOns s nete Od nd Rh Ae OR Pais wate Oia eh wl Od ea Ma 410 Updating the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only 0 000 412 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 415 DEM 300 modem s rorarii ge ee a ee tld oo Dre ee OREN a Rose we 416 Introduction to the DCM 300 modem 2 0 aeaaee 416 Benefits of using a DCM 300 modem 1 0 2 0 eee eee 416 Connecting the DCM 300 modem 1 2 ee eee 417 Unlocking the DCM 300 modem with passcodes 0 0 000000 ce eee 418 Activating the DCM 300 modem 0 e ee eee 418 Configuring the DCM 300 modem 1 2 eee 419 AGS000MOdEM siei ed he ile es Od wR ad E E GW OM oR SSG ate a de Wes 421 Introduction to the Ag3000 modem 1 ee 421 Connecting the Ag3000 modem 1 2 ee ee 421 Activating the Ag3000 modem 1 eee 422 Configuring the Ag3000 modem 1 ee 422 The EZ Remote Joystick 2 2 2 0 0 eee eee 425 Requirements perrera oe AR SEAS Gao RR PR EA SGD D MR aS paw eRR EEA 426 Installation sea iwi aie aa eee aie bea eB eh se aaa Oe Oo ee alae ace Oe eS 426 Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick 6 ee eee 426 The LB25 External Lightbar 266 64 s bei eae ee eee Ow 429 Configuring
113. you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved then it is OK to not force a rebench Tip To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on the slide out tab Configuring the Valve Setup for all leveling models When you select the Valve Setup tab on the FieldLevel II Setup screen the following items are available Item Description Valve Type Select the Valve Type field and then select the type of valve that is connected CAN Bus Select the port on the FmX integrated display that the valve module is connected to Valve inverted Leave this field as Not Inverted unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve If this is the case select Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Configuring the Height Filter for all leveling models When you select the Height Filter tab on the FieldLevel II Setup screen the following items are available in the Filter Type list Item Description None Trimble recommends this setting this is the raw GPS data used for height Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls Jump detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings When selected the following values m
114. 0 In the Rows field enter 1 Operating the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin Run screen When the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin is installed the following tab appears on the main guidance screen the Run screen in tn elt a Creating a survey Benchmarks Before you can create a survey you must set a benchmark a point at a known location When you are leveling you can use benchmarks to do two things e Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re calibrate your exact position This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling e Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point The first benchmark you create on a field is called the master benchmark Field coordinates are calculated from this point Subsequent benchmarks are called benchmarks In either plan or perspective view A master benchmark appears as an orange flag labeled MB EB e Benchmarks appear as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number B8 180 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 A master benchmark and several benchmarks shown in plan view Note You can choose for coordinates to be recorded with X Y and Height offsets from the master benchmark position See Configuration page 178 Note You do not need to drive over a benchmark to be able to delete it FmX
115. 0 Series Combines page 411 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 403 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Operating the Yield Monitor plugin Run Screen 9999999990999 059 999999099099900 21 1 Instant Vieta 186 87 bu a Wet Weight Per Ban 180 0 Ibs Actual Cut Width 30 00 Crop Type Run screen item Coverage map Information screen button Plugin tab Coverage tab 0 Yield monitor status tab 404 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Plugin tab 21 1 Instant Yield 186 87 bu a Wet Weight Per Bin 180 0 Ibs Actual Cut Width 30 00 Crop Type Corn Plugin tab item Instant moisture Instant yield Wet weight per bin Actual cut width auto and manual Crop type 0 0 0 Empty bin clears the wet bin weight Coverage map layers User defined minimum and maximum levels with seven ranges e Yield Moisture Yield Monitor status buttons Auto width detection aids accurate area calculations by automatically reducing the cut width when entering or exiting point rows and other previously harvested areas If you are harvesting a row crop with pre configured rows then the width reduces on an overlap by one row at a time The yield monitor buttons at the bottom of the map screen allow you to manually reduce the cut width each button reduces the cut width by one sixth of the he
116. 0 sanaan 389 WM StAN ATOM aa ae erate aly Hurst cage gre a os a ee heh oe dlae e AMEE aoe ad See tie SOG 390 Configuring the Productivity Monitoring plugin 0 0 0 0 eee eee 390 Operation scs s iori det ai oe Ob aa ee ASE i a ae eee eee wD we 392 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 2 2 2 cee ee 393 Supported Platforms vii eee Gia ee eb e Rack Oe ORR EP po eee PRs 394 astaan enoa baa a ioe de seh ed SRE EE eee de oP oak Ged 394 FmX John Deere 9x60 or 9x70 yield monitor 0 00 00 ee eee eee 394 FmX AgLeader YM2000 yield monitor 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 396 COnMSUTALON es miy BoA de eee ee a eee Ee wv Bae ed oh a ate ee ne ee 397 Configuring the FmX integrated display to perform yield monitoring 397 Configuring the John Deere Yield Monitor anans ee Lee EERO ae ee ee 399 Calibration sk Gap asa dei we he owen inde ad amp Goatees ee So has oO RA 403 Calibrating yield monitoring 2 2 ee ee 403 Operating the Yield Monitor plugin 2 ee ene 404 R n SCLCCM e seat GO Bade salons ek al a Vale Gan ie ie a ten iw amp Wale Socata s 404 Pl gin tab dya yoe eta eR o la ae aoe ad Se ee oe ee E 405 Coverage map layers ve idan Sa ee he eG dh pee Oho waa oe eb eae 405 Yield Monitor status buttons 1 0 ee eee 405 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 19 20 21 22 23 Contents IMfOTMAHON SCLEEN essa a aes Saco dak ok se Se ew Ae S 406 Fror MCSSAREB lt i co ad Fe evs oS Ale Mos
117. 1 The LB25 External Lightbar Configuring the virtual lightbar The FmX integrated display has default settings for the virtual lightbar that should suit most drivers If the settings are not appropriate configure the lightbar as follows 1 From the Display Setup screen select Lightbar and then tap Setup In the Light Bars Configuration screen the virtual lightbar from the FmX integrated display is shown along with any detected external lightbars Light Bars Configuration er 2 Select the Virtual Lightbar and then tap Setup Configure the following settings Setting Affects Default This setting determines setting Look ahead EZ Guide Plus 0 seconds The distance ahead of the vehicle that the time lightbar lightbar will use for LED guidance and offline distance FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Setting Affects Default This setting determines setting LED spacing Virtual lightbar 3 cm per The distance represented by each LED on the and EZ Guide LED 1 per lightbar Plus lightbar LED Display Mode Virtual lightbar show error How the LEDs respond to offline distances When and EZ Guide chase mode Show error is selected the display shows the Plus lightbar direction that you need to move in When Show correction is selected the display shows your current distance offline To set the look ahead time or the LE
118. 1000 hours of use due to possible changes in light output This is generally done at the factory or authorized service center Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32 48 above the crop canopy 38 is the optimum height and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED window of the sensor Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The TrueGuide Plugin In this chapter m Connecting the TrueGuide implement guidance system m Configuring the TrueGuide implement guidance system m Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system This chapter describes how to configure the TrueGuide implement guidance plugin to work with the FmX integrated display Note Firmware version 2 0 or later of the FmX integrated display and the NavController II firmware version 5 10 are required for TrueGuide implement guidance The TrueGuide plugin for the Autopilot automated steering system and the FmX integrated display supports a second GPS receiver an FmX internal or external AgGPS receiver on the implement that is used to measure the position of the implement so that the Autopilot system can adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on line The TrueGuide system supports towed implements for front steered tracked
119. 106 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the Engage tab Vehicle Engage Steering Advanced Operator Timeout 5 min Coverage Log Z oww _ 1 Inthe Engage tab select Operator Timeout 2 Inthe Enter The EZ Steer Operator Timeout screen enter a value and then tap OK 3 In the Coverage Log list select either Manual or When Engaged Configuring the Steering tab Vehicle Engoge Steering Advanced Nudge increment 0 0 0 ots of Row Warning 164 0 5 i Legacy Sensors None bad owm _ In the Steering tab select Nudge Increment fe In the Enter The Nudge Increment Distance screen enter the distance the Run screen Nudge buttons move the line back to the correct path and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 107 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 108 3 Select End of Row Warning Dist 4 Inthe Enter End of Row Warning Distance screen enter the distance for the end of row warning Note Longer vehicles that may take longer to turn require an earlier warning which dictates a greater distance 5 Inthe Autosense list select either On or Off Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device that require this setting be set to On Older Autopilot system installations that use the electrical system to measure the vehicle status select the appropriate connections under Step 7 Legacy Sensors 6 Inthe Valv
120. 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Calibrating the implement 1 From the Configuration screen select the TrueTracker plugin and then tap Calibrate implement Controller Setup OQ Controller Orientation 2 Select an item to configure and then tap OK 3 Configure the selected item To configure See page Controller orientation page 353 Steering sensor page 353 Automated steering deadzone page 354 Steering gain page 356 Roll antenna correction page 361 Line acquisition page 363 352 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the controller orientation 1 Select the Controller Orientation option from the list An image represents the current mounting orientation of the controller The image is shown as though You are looking down on the vehicle from above The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle 2 Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller If the controller is set at a sloped angle tap Direct Entry and then enter the yaw pitch and roll angles of the controller Note If you use the Direct Entry method to set custom angles the on screen image of the controller does not appear 3 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit Calibrating the Implement Steering Sensor Perform steering sensor calibration to convert the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering
121. 42 6 EZ Steer motor cable 62257 1 Use the FmX to EZ Steer cable to connect the EZ Steer system to the display Note The CAN cable connects to either the C or D port on the rear of the FmX integrated display 2 Attach the EZ Steer controller to the dash Use the provided bracket 136 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating and configuring the EZ Steer system The calibration configures the T2 roll calibration and the EZ Steer system Angle per Turn Aggressiveness and Freeplay settings Before you calibrate the vehicle do the following Ensure that the vehicle s hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature Refer to the vehicle documentation Ensure that the tire pressure is correct Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a high clearance sprayer After initial calibration is completed you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle The EZ Steer calibration process requires a straight A B line If you do not create an A B line before you begin the calibration the system prompts you to open a field and create one Calibrating the EZ Steer system To calibrate the EZ Steer system to work with the FmX integrated display you must complete the following 1 Enter the vehicle settings See
122. 5 16 17 18 14 Implement status textitems 2 eee 365 Impl ment tab gi Ae ES ee SRR ER Ea eee a ee ee ee eS 366 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 1 2 2 ee ann anan 367 Non Trimble variable rate controllers nonan aaa 368 Installing a non Trimble variable rate controller 0 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 368 Enabling the Serial Rate Control plugin 2 2 ee 369 Configuring the spray boom in the FmX integrated display 369 Enabling and configuring the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display 369 Configuring the variable rate controller 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 eee eee eee 371 Setting any other features of the variable rate controller 376 Additional information for non Trimble variable rate controllers 377 Prescription ii s 2 oS Ha Ae OH ER ede edo e EEA Odea Sea oa 377 The Remote Output Plugin 2 2 anana 379 Connecting remote output n ouaaa 380 Configuring the Remote Output plugin osna asaue 380 Calibrating the lead time for your implement 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 382 Setting the front back offset 0 eee ee 383 Calibrating the front back offset 2 2 ee ee 383 Setting the lead tie wos aseos Fae Be ae SE Ko ee hee RW ee ee 383 The Serial Data Input Plugin 1 ee 385 Connecting serial data input ossaa ee ee ee 386 Configuring serial data input ssas saaana 386 The Productivity Monitoring Plugin 2 000
123. 7 Viewing vehicle diagnostic information 0 0 ee eee ee eee 467 Vehicle Diagnostics Guidance screen 0 0 eee ee eee ee 468 Vehicle Diagnostics Steering screen nonna aa 469 Vehicle Diagnostics Details screen 2 nuaa 470 Autopilot Faults screen saaa aaaea 471 View Warning Sereen Th saccade gtd Me deed E b Geek dee eee ee e De gals 471 GPS Status screens os eb ee ELA Say oe OU AWE EGR ERA CR ES eee ees 472 Sereen SNAPS ck sored ds eke bw alae he hal a alah E ae eal A a ee ee 472 Forcing the system to turnoff aoaaa auaa 473 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Introduction This manual describes how to install configure and use the available plugins for the Trimble FmX integrated display version 5 11 Even if you have used other Global Positioning System GPS products before Trimble recommends that you spend some time reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product If you are not familiar with GPS visit the Trimble website www trimble com for an interactive look at Trimble and GPS About the product The Trimble FmX integrated display which consists of both software and hardware is an easy to use advanced field management system The software runs on a 30 cm 12 touch sensitive color LCD screen The FmX integrated display is the highest level display for agricultural purposes by Trimble The display is compatible with the Autopilot automated steer
124. AUTION The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle Be prepared for sudden wheel movements 4 Tap Next in the next two screens that appear 5 Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the values in the Slew Time and Overshoot fields for the Turn Left phase a Adjust the New Gain field if required b Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test The test is for the stop to stop position 122 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 c Tap Turn Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and low overshoot percentage less than 5 8 6 Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew 7 When you locate the best gain value do one of the following Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure FmX Integrated Display User Guide 123 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 124 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point
125. Adjusting the status text size You can control the size of the status text items that are shown at the top of the Run screen You can show one of the status text items in a large size or both status text items in a smaller size Description Example One large status text item N Two smaller status text items To cycle through the status text item display modes tap the items at the top of the screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Introduction to coverage logging Coverage logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation for example applying fertilizer to a field The covered area appears on the Run screen as a translucent yellow area that shows skips as well as single double and triple coverage Single coverage Double coverage Triple coverage To activate coverage logging tap the Logging button on the Run screen so that it changes from gray to green Tap the button again to stop coverage logging Logging varieties By default coverage logging appears yellow see above However you can set up varieties that make it easy to see the difference between different types of coverage This enables you to e Change product part way through a field so that you can later identify which parts of the field are covered in which product FmX Integrated Display User Guide 65 3
126. Altitude 131 2 8 the second GPS receiver mounted on the implement for the Satellites 42 TrueTracker system then the upper information row relates to the vehicle GPS receiver and the lower information row relates to the second GPS receiver Engage button When you create a guidance line you can use the Engage button to engage or disengage the Autopilot automated steering system The button has three states Engage status Button color Vehicle icon color Ready to engage ct etx To engage the vehicle tap Engage The system engages and the button turns green FmX Integrated Display User Guide 47 3 Getting Started 48 To disengage the vehicle do one of the following e Turn the steering wheel to trigger the manual override Tap Engage The system disengages and the Engage button turns gray If the button is red tap it to find out why Logging button The Logging button engages and disengages coverage logging Logging button color Meaning Green Coverage logging is engaged Gray Coverage logging is not engaged Plugin information tabs As with the plugin tabs the plugin information tabs that appear differ depending on which plugins are installed Mapping information tab The Mapping information tab enables you to view your coverage from a number of perspectives Setting Example Coverage shows Overlap General coverage and overlap
127. Area AreaFeature One row of data is stored in the lt type gt dbf file for each feature of that feature type recorded in the field The following information is stored in the lt type gt dbf file for each feature Column Field description Notes Date Date the feature was created yyyyimmdda Time Time the feature was recorded hh mm ss s Version Features attribute file version ID Feature ID Name Feature name Area Field area Area only ha Perimeter Field perimeter distance Area only meters Length Length of the AB Line meters SwathsIn Dist1 Dist2 PrefWeight Only recorded in point features ssi ststs lt s s lt CSCO Latitude Antenna latitude decimal degrees Longitude Antenna longitude decimal degrees Height Ground mean sea level height at antenna position If you meters are mapping on a slope the height may be wrong AlarmRad Alarm radius meters Warningrad Warningradis mtes Status_Txt GPS status meters FmX Integrated Display User Guide 453 23 Data Management Program Log message file The FmX integrated display performs checks e when the display is turned on or off e periodically while running This information is saved to the ProgramLog txt file which is in the AgGPS Diagnostics folder When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB it is backed up to a file called ProgramLog old The ProgramLog tx
128. Bac Qe ee Bed to we 449 TaskDatatoldet so 055 tua bau beth Pa ee pa e Sea dees 4 eR Bae 449 Files on the USB memory stick 0 ee ene 450 Field boundary and AB Line files 2 2 2 ee eee 450 Coverage logging data 1 eee 451 Track logging Ples s sentesi sni a a ERA oe agent a a as Gide ee Se EY ee aS 451 Event History files 4c ecbcab0x dd oe hb ead sete deta de tede bb ead das 452 Features files i s cies Ae he ale a A Ree ae Oe Dee ele God Red 453 Program Log message file so ndati ee eid na ba dis oe Od Ses Se ee ala ix 454 Importing AB Lines or boundaries 1 1 ee ee 454 The Prescriptions folder 1 aas uce cee eee 456 Copying or deleting data files 2 eee 457 Accessing data files from the Home screen 2 0 00 e eee eee eee 457 Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen 4 457 Copying data s wes trresna a e we he yb Se a ede ge aa a ae eee 458 Deleting data gc otk Sea ot Fa Ok OR es Re PE ee wR DOS 458 Data ictlomaries isk isd ans eae a hoe ae Oe wal al a Wane er abs ade Dae tee 460 Troubleshooting 2 chi esc vein we ease dedewiwtwawus 463 Advanced diagnostics oss se es ck ee eee ee ee a Se ees 464 Viewing raw serial data 1 eee 465 Restoring default settings 2 ene 466 Viewing FmX integrated display diagnostic information 000000 467 Display configuration information 1 0 0 eee eee 467 USB memory stick information 2 0 0 eee ee 46
129. CAN cable with port replicator 75407 Display to John Deere 9x70 all or 9x60 non ATR ready 76509 Display to John Deere 9x60 ATR ready 77692 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Connecting the John Deere 60 series combine Note The John Deere 60 series combine must have moisture sensor version 1 20c installed for yield monitoring to function correctly For more information see Updating the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only page 412 l Ensure that the antenna is correctly installed and run the cable down the right hand side of the cab Run the antenna cable through the hole to come into the back right corner of the cab Plug the antenna cable into the FmX integrated display Plug the yield monitoring cable into the diagnostics connector on the combine For ATR ready vehicles use cable P N 77692 For NONATR ready vehicles use cable P N 76509 Connect the yield monitoring cable to the FmX cable P N 75407 which is connected to Port B on the display Trimble recommends that you do not use Port A Connecting the John Deere 70 series combine 1 Ensure that the antenna is correctly installed and run the cable down the right hand side of the cab Run the antenna cable through the hole to come into the back right corner of the cab Plug the antenna cable into the FmX integrated display Plug the yield monitoring cable P N 76509 into the diagnostics connector on the combine Connect the yield monitoring cable to the Fm
130. Calibration from the list on the Vehicle Controller Setup screen 2 From the Location drop down list select the AutoSense position 3 From the Orientation drop down list select the AutoSense orientation 4 Tap OK to confirm selections Calibrating the steering angle sensor Perform steering sensor calibration to convert the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement Note Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures Note Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle Ifan AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor the Steering Sensor screen does not appear This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion Ensure that you e Perform this procedure on a hard level surface that is free of obstructions e Maintain a tractor speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph e Watch the Sensor Angle field for a symmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the wheels to full right and full left e Watch the Sensor Angle field to ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight ahead 116 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 To run the steering sensor calibration L Select the Steering Angle procedure from the calibration list See Autopilot calibration page 111 ins
131. Cross Slope value to 0 000 Composite When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined the Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading where water will fall If you have 0 000 slope on the Cross axis the Composite Heading will be the same as the Primary Heading FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 209 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Defining a plane using a single point 1 From the Run screen select the Survey Design plugin and then create a benchmark that will be used to define the direction of the slope and its heading Note It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point for example where the water will enter or exit the field This ensures that where the benchmark is the plane is on grade 2 Select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Design i Oe 0 100 prot 00 amet aw Flip 115 00 i l TEIE x 3 Ifmore than one benchmark is stored tap Choose Pivot and then select the benchmark that you want to be on grade 4 Tap OK The Plane Editor screen appears 5 Ifusing a known offset enter it into the Height Above Pivot field 6 Enter the values for Primary Slope Primary Heading and Cross Slope For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis the slope values must be keyed in as negative values Ifyou want to define the primary heading by measuring a second point see Defining a plane using multiple benchmarks page 211 7 To change
132. D spacing 1 Tap the appropriate number field 2 Inthe dialog that appears enter the required values To set the display mode 1 From the Display Mode drop down list select the required option 2 Enter the virtual lightbar settings and then tap OK The Lightbars Configuration screen appears 3 Tap OK The virtual lightbar is now configured EZ Remote joystick For more information on installing and configuring the EZ Remote joystick see Chapter 20 The EZ Remote Joystick Guidance Selecting Guidance enables you to configure advanced guidance settings If you are setting up the system for the first time you should not need to adjust these settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide 97 4 Display Setup Enabling the Limit Field Selection filter From the Display Setup screen select Guidance and then tap Setup To review the settings or if you have any guidance lines originally generated with an AgGPS 170 Field Computer or an FieldManager display see Advanced diagnostics page 464 Sounds 1l From the Display Setup screen select Sounds and then tap Setup There are two ways that the display can produce sounds FmX through an optional external speaker Sonalert through an optional Sonalert alarm 2 To enable a sound select the required option from the drop down list and then tap OK 98 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 CAN bus settings Note These settings a
133. Delete mL GOs Ou ge Ge er E When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted Deleting all of the data from the USB memory stick CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data From the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears Tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen appears Select External USB Drive from the tabs and then select the data to delete Tap either Delete All Events or select the data to delete xy An A WN When prompted tap Yes The data in the internal memory is deleted FmX Integrated Display User Guide 459 23 Data Management Data dictionaries The FmX integrated display can load data dictionaries in the AgGPS 170 Field Computer format These data dictionaries enable you to select field entry data for example Client Farm Field and Event from a list of predefined values which saves you from having to re enter commonly used items You can create a data dictionary either through the display or the Farm Works software For more information on editing data dictionary entries on the FmX integrated display see Data Dictionary page 95 To create a data dictionary on an office computer 1 Onan office computer create a text file The text file can have any name but the file
134. Display User Guide Layout tab The Field IQ Plugin 10 Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Layout Material Setting Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 279 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one
135. Display User Guide CHAPTER VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems In this chapter This chapter describes how to install and configure the DCM 300 or Ag3000 modem to m DCM 300 modem work with the FmX integrated display m Ag3000 modem FmX Integrated Display User Guide 415 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems DCM 300 modem Introduction to the DCM 300 modem The DCM 300 modem enables the FmX integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a Trimble VRS network a third party RTK provider or a Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS Benefits of using a DCM 300 modem The benefits of using the FmX integrated display and the DCM 300 modem include the following e More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to your display e Easy interface and configuration with the display e Roof mounted high gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone signal related drop outs e On screen wireless status and diagnostics e The DCM 300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need reliable communications for their farming operations e The DCM 300 modem is available with a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally or an EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the USA 416 FmX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Connecting the DCM 300 modem P3 GPS
136. ELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE RODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS 4 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU PLEASE NOTE THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS E G MEMBER STATES OF THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA IN WHICH PRODUCT WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL DEALER FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED IN SUCH A CASE PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION Official Language THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS ENGLISH IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL CONTROL Registration TO RECEIVE INFORMATION REGARDING UPDATES AND NEW PRODUCTS PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL DEALER OR VISIT THE TRIMBLE WEBSITE AT www trimble com register UPON REGISTRATION YOU MAY SELECT THE NEWSLETTER UPGRADE OR NEW PRODUCT INFORMATION Y
137. For the latest versions of these documents go to www trimble com agriculture Note When using Rawson drives and when using more than one material you must have a separate Section Control Module SCM for materials using Rawson drives FmX Integrated Display User Guide 225 10 The Field IQ Plugin Field IQ master switch box functions Feature o Trimble ingas o 00 Increment decrement switch Function Increases the applied amount by a set amount the amount is set in the Setup screen Rate tab Rate switch Choose to use preset Rate 1 preset Rate 2 or Manual rate LED indicator Red Unit is powered but not communicating with the FmX integrated display Green Unit is powered and communicating with the FmX integrated display Yellow Unit is initializing communications with the FmX integrated display Automatic Manual section switch Automatic mode The FmX integrated display automatically opens and closes sections when entering areas of overlap non apply zones or crossing boundaries Manual mode The sections are controlled by the user using the Field IQ system x Tip You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode while traveling Master switch e 5a Jump start position The same functions as in Master On are active plus the system is overridden to use a preset control speed the speed is set in the Setup screen Override tab e 5b On p
138. Go to the Trimble website www trimble com 2 Click the Support button at the top of the screen The Support A Z list of products appears 3 Scroll to the bottom of the list 4 Click the submit an inquiry link A form appears 5 Complete the form and then click Send Alternatively you can send an email to trimble_support trimble com Your comments Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to improve it with each revision Email your comments to ReaderFeedback trimble com 18 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview In this chapter System components Using the FmX integrated display Installing the display Connecting the display Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket External lightbar s CHAPTER The FmX integrated display is a touch sensitive screen that runs field management software This chapter introduces the FmX integrated display and some of the basic operations Also covered is the usage of the FmX integrated display s mapping and guidance features The chapter explains how to set up and use the field features and how to perform steering navigation FmX Integrated Display User Guide 19 2 Display Overview System components Pack out contents The box contains the following components e The FmX integrated display e The mount bracket and screws e GNSS antenna e GNSS antenna mounting plate e Power cables e Quick reference card e Documentation CD
139. Guidance option the Autopilot option or the FieldLevel II plugin the system automatically adds a GPS Receiver option that controls the internal GPS receiver In addition the system may have another GPS receiver For example the TrueTracker system uses a second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS Receiver option This chapter describes how to configure the four versions of the GPS Receiver option FmX Integrated Display User Guide 149 6 The GPS Receiver Configuring the GPS receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup 2 In the Corrections drop down list tap the appropriate corrections to use 3 IfRTK corrections are selected enter the appropriate base station network ID 4 IfHP XP type corrections are selected the Autoseed technology options become available For more information see Autoseed fast restart technology page 153 150 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Entering 450 MHz frequencies The GPS Receiver 6 If your FmX integrated display has a 450 MHz internal radio you can set the radio frequency and radio wireless modes 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup Manual Guidance GPS Receiver Settings Settings Frequencies SecureRTK Logging Rador Output Receiver Internal Primary hd Corrections TK a Net ID 2 o oa _ Vehicle No GPS Old radio fw Select the
140. Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Additional information for non Trimble variable rate controllers Prescriptions You can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received from the controller and both target and applied rates are shown on the screen In addition data relating to the variable rate application may be logged to the card The information describing prescriptions for the Field IQ system also applies to non Trimble variable rate controllers FmX Integrated Display User Guide 377 14 The Serial Rate Control Plugin 378 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Remote Output Plugin In this chapter m Connecting remote output m Configuring the Remote Output plugin m Calibrating the lead time for your implement When remote output is activated the FmX integrated display outputs pulses for an external device For example you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter This chapter explains how to configure the Remote Output plugin so that the display can output data FmX Integrated Display User Guide 379 15 The Remote Output Plugin Connecting remote output The signal that is output on pin 2 of the FmX integrated display s B port is a 5 volt signal with a rating of approximately 70
141. I system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field The color cut fill map simple on screen adjustments and automatic blade control makes leveling easy e For improved productivity when leveling a field the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual scraper implements With a tandem system the second scraper is also controlled by GPS which means that you can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers With a dual system an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper Terminology A cut is a point on the field where dirt needs to be removed A cut occurs when the existing field is higher than the proposed field surface A fillis a point on the field where dirt must be added A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the proposed field surface A neutral is a point on the field where the existing and proposed elevations are the same No dirt needs to be moved at this location FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Benefits of the FieldLevel Il system The FieldLevel II system enables you to Conserve precious water resources Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil Perform touch up leveling each year to avoid expensive land leveling services Help contro
142. Integrated Display User Guide 181 9 182 The FieldLevel II Plugins Creating a benchmark 1 Place the GPS antenna in a known repeatable location that will not change throughout the leveling of a field X Tip Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot 2 Stop the vehicle 3 Tap Bench on the FieldLevel Survey Design tab Note If the FieldLevel II plugin is installed you can tap Bench on that instead Both Bench buttons have the same effect A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark To stop the averaging during the countdown tap Bench again Note Ifyou are within the circle around an existing benchmark a new mark is not created Rebenching When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark the following message appears on the Run screen N If you tap either of the Rebench buttons when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark Re establishing a benchmark In the FieldLevel II configuration under the Relative Heights tab there is an option to Force Re Bench If you plan to use the same base receiver setup each time you use this survey data you can set the option to No However if you plan to shift the location of the base set this option to Yes FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 If you open a field t
143. Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field JQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen 308 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide A The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the modules WARNING The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See a
144. OU DESIRE Registration To receive information regarding updates and new products please contact your local dealer or visit the Trimble website at www trimble com register Upon registration you may select the newsletter upgrade or new product information you desire Notices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits TRIMBLE is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may n
145. Online Aggressiveness setting by aye 5 The default value is set in the Steering Settings setup screen Vehicle specific performance Before you use the EZ Steer system Trimble recommends that you consider the following vehicle specific performance suggestions Vehicle type Performance hint 2WD tractor For an EZ Steer system installed on tractors that have SuperSteer for example New Holland TG If the tractor has a SuperSteer front axle for best performance e Reduce the Online Aggressiveness value e Line up close to the swath and make certain that the front wheels are straight before engaging the EZ Steer system e To get smoother performance when the vehicle is pulling an implement over tilled ground enable the Diff Lock This prevents the machine from pulling sharply to the left or right If you are calibrating on a hard surface turn off Diff Lock AWD tractor The EZ Steer system can be installed on Case IH STX tractors with Accusteer For optimal performance disable Accusteer using the switch in the cab if possible 146 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Vehicle type Performance hint Sprayer It is common for these vehicles to have slow steering To compensate for this use high aggressiveness If you experience large slow oscillations increase the aggressiveness When you configure the system on a sprayer the Sprayer steering delay se
146. SN123456 C AgGPSFMD_SN123457 C AgGPSFMD_SN123458 Data formats 442 The FmxX integrated display uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute ESRI 3D shape file format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field for example spray coverage track logging points and features The three files in a shapefile set are e The lt filename gt dbf file which contains the feature attributes e The lt filename gt shp file which contains position information e The lt ilename gt shx file which is an index file that links the position information with its attributes In this manual the term shapefile is used to refer to the three files collectively The FmX integrated display records all latitude longitude and height data in decimal degrees FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Note The FmX integrated display reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2 0 or 3 1 3D polylines polygons and points The M and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3 1 can be generated in the track logging files but cannot be read by the FmX integrated display For more information go to the ESRI website www esri com Editing files ESRI shape shp and attribute dbf files can be used in many other software packages that can import or use shp and dbf formats Trimble recommends the Farm Works software For more information go to www farmworks com Data collected by the F
147. Setup SIM Card Setup N Cancel ox 422 FmX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 From the Port drop down list select the FmX port that the Ag3000 modem is connected to The default setting is DCM 300 Select the VRS Server Setup tab 5 Enter the required settings as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator as described below Internet base setting Description Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base station port number Mount Point Base station mount point User Name Assigned username Password Assigned password 6 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears The Ag3000 modem is now configured Note SIM tab fields In the USA the Ag3000 modem has an AT amp T card you do not need to enter the details Outside of the USA you must obtain details of the SIM card from the card provider and then enter them FmX Integrated Display User Guide 423 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 424 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The EZ Remote Joystick In this chapter This chapter describes the EZ Remote joystick which is a programmable external device that controls the functions of the FmX integrated m Installation display m Requirements m Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick If you use the EZ Remote joystick you do not need to tap buttons on the FmX i
148. Steering Required to learn the vehicle s steering dead zones Deadzone Steering Gain Required only if system steering performance is unsatisfactory proportional steering gain The steering deadzone is the amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to turn To configure this vehicle type See Hydraulically steered tracked tractors Page 129 Tracked tractor Page 129 Calibrating the Autopilot option 1 From the Home screen tap K 2 In the Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Calibrate Vehicle Controller Setup Ce 4 Select an item to configure and then tap OK 112 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 5 Configure the selected item Vehicle Guidance Options 5 To configure See page Controller orientation page 113 Manual override page 114 Steering sensor page 116 Automated steering deadzone page 119 Steering gain page 121 Roll antenna correction page 125 Line acquisition page 128 Configuring the controller orientation 1 Select the Controller Orientation option from the list An image represents the current mounting orientation of the controller The image is shown as though You are looking down on the vehicle from above The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle 2 Use the buttons to select the orientation of the
149. Step 2 work log field data State 2 During boot up Never sees the armrest header unit moisture sensor or reports which one is not visible by the FmX integrated display Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B is there another value other than zero for CAN messages 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX has been changed 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FmX Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a change for header height FmX Integrated Display User Guide 407 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Error message Cause Resolution State 3 During boot up Will show which controller is not 1 visible armrest header unit moisture sensor Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B is there another value other than zero for CAN messages 2 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded 3 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FmX has been changed 4 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FmX 5 Raise head up o
150. T EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION PRODUCTION INSTALLATION OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND URISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS SBAS WAAS EGNOS AND MSAS OMNISTAR GPS MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES OR FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS Limitation of Liability TRIMBLES ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE LICENSE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY R
151. USER GUIDE FmX Integrated Display Version 5 11 Revision A Part Number 93023 80 ENG April 2011 Trimble Agriculture Business Area Trimble Navigation Limited Trimble Agriculture Division 10355 Westmoor Drive Suite 100 Westminster CO 80021 USA trimble_support trimble com www trimble com Legal Notices Copyright and Trademarks 2011 Trimble Navigation Limited All rights reserved Trimble the Globe amp Triangle logo AgGPS EZ Guide EZ Steer FmX and Tru Count are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States and in other countries Autopilot Autoseed AutoSense EZ Office FieldManager Field IQ FreeForm VRS VRS Now T2 TrueGuide and TrueTracker are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited GreenSeeker is a registered trademark of NTech Ltd For STL support the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 1996 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology Microsoft Windows ActiveX Excel and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Portions Copyright 2009 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Portions Copyright 2003 Bitstream Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective own
152. X cable P N 75407 which is connected to Port B on the display Trimble recommends that you do not use Port A FmX Integrated Display User Guide 395 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin FmX AgLeader YM2000 yield monitor This figure shows how to connect the FmX integrated display to the AgLeader YM 2000 yield monitoring system Item Description Trimble part number 1 FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX basic power cable 67258 8 m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 50449 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 00S 6 Display to DE9 RS232 cable 67091 Connecting the Ag Leader YM 2000 1 Ensure that the antenna is correctly installed and run the antenna cable into the cab for best desired fit 2 Plug yield monitor cable P N 67094 into port A or port B and run the cable to the YM 2000 3 Plug the yield monitoring cable P N 67091 into the serial connector on the YM 2000 4 Connect the yield monitoring cable to the FmX cable P N 75407 which must be connected to port A or port B on the rear of the FmX integrated display 396 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Configuration Configuring the FmX integrated display to perform yield monitoring Units of measure Select the unit of measure to be used in the Language and Units screen in the FmX integrated display setup For more information see the Selecting the language units of
153. a aca eo eb eA alee ee ae a a Os 152 Autoseed fast restart technology 1 eee 153 Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software 2 0 0 0000 e eee ee 154 Enabling NMEA message output sssaaa 154 Enabling radar output 2 ee ee ee 155 Configuring radar output coea sas ee 156 Implement Configuration 200222 08s e eee 159 IntroduchiOn renser ereer angin Ee pE E ke ke Be ee bee Ge oe ik be 160 Creating an implement 3 22 cd eased eee eS ee ee EE eee eae 160 Selecting an existing implement oaaae 161 Importing an implement from the FieldManager display oonan 161 Adjusting the implement settings 2 0 0 ee ee eee 162 Implement Type sii sue ebb gree wae beast d Rene a EA ee CERES 162 M as r mentS sri e saca ol hsb este checkout te sect ote ana ae hohe al ance Maser cae Herendeen 163 GEOMELY swe sede te Reset h on BS Bk oe EGS he hia Wares 164 Overlap i s4edad eRe Ee See bee Re ES Sereda eee Se Vea Ree Cea ae 165 DI WALCH OS ta gaa An Sa te eco te MORO ch amen animate Gla etal Sr noes Ao oe na ate 165 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 9 Contents 10 Del ting an implement s oc 40 a eg ed ee eek ey ba Ee al ee eda Oe Re A 166 Overview of Plugins 1 2 es 167 Introduction to plugins 2 ee ee 168 Viewing the currently installed plugins 1 ee ee 169 Adding or removing a pl gih ebs rise so serei pr Ra ge DR OLE aa RR PRES 170 Configuring a plugin s sani eaa taei
154. a device to the FmX integrated display connect the Variable Rate Control cable P N 67091 to the port D connector on the display The other end of the Variable Rate Control cable connects to a serial connector Note An additional adaptor may be required depending on the pin out for the serial device Configuring serial data input 1 Install the Serial Data Input plugin See Adding or removing a plugin page 170 2 On the Configuration screen select the Serial Data Input plugin and then tap Setup 3 Inthe Port list select the port that the device is connected to It is usually P5 Serial I O Configuration settings for that port appear on the right of the screen 4 Set the following to the values at which the sensor outputs data Baud rate Parity Data bits Stop bits 5 The Prefix and Suffix fields are the start and end points of the data you want to collect To log data from the start of the line leave the Prefix field empty To drop introductory characters enter them in the Prefix field For example if you receive data that begins GPGGA enter 24GP in the Prefix field The logged data will begin GGA 386 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Data Input Plugin 16 Note 24 is the ASCII code for To log to the end of the line keep the default Suffix field OD 0A 6 Enter the log interval This determines how regularly the data is written to the file
155. ab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag in the ground to mark the vehicle center line for this pass 7 Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 8 Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin location very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 9 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass 10 Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in the table on page 127 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following figure shows an example ofa right offset measure the distance between the flags 11 Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use the following table to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run Test run Offset distance Offset direction 1 2 3 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 127 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Test run Offset
156. ace This configuration is ideal for complex surfaces with high variability slopes Secondary GPS antenna Cc Co Primary GPS antenna Dual Scraper system Note For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls FmX Integrated Display User Guide 215 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin 216 Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller There are six steps to complete Step 1 Configuring the implement Step 2 Preparing the FmX integrated display and antenna connections Step 3 Configuring the primary receiver Step 4 Configuring the secondary receiver Step 5 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin Step 6 Calibrating the Tandem Dual valve module Step 1 Configuring the implement Ifyou have not already configured the implement see Configuring the implement for leveling page 179 Step 2 Preparing the FmX integrated display and antenna connections Ifnot already installed on the FmX integrated display install the FieldLevel II plugin followed by the Tandem Dual plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 When both plugins are installed the Configuration screen will show both the FieldLevel II plugin with its associated GPS receiver and the Tandem Dual plugin with its associated GPS receiver FmxX Integrated Display User Guid
157. ace for manually adjusting GPS receiver settings This is recommended for advanced users only To access the virtual AgRemote interface 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Diagnostics The GPS Status screen appears 2 Tap AgRemote The virtual AgRemote interface appears For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface refer to the AgRemote Software Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www trimble com Enabling NMEA message output The NMEA message formats are a standard format through which GPS receivers can communicate If you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller you can enable NMEA message output from the controller so that the device receives NMEA GPS positions The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector Some GPS receivers can output NMEA messages to an external device To do this 1 On the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option and then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 2 Tap NMEA Output 3 Select the appropriate Message Rate and then the Baud Rate 4 In the Messages Enabled group select the appropriate NMEA message types to output Do not just enable all formats 154 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 5 Tap OK to continue Note To enable NMEA output from another receiver for example the GPS receiver connected to an TrueTracker system controlle
158. ach copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with t
159. ad Height field and then enter a height this value must be at least 1 number lower then the John Deere Stop Head Height In the Grain Flow Delay field enter the time in seconds that it takes the grain to travel from the header to the clean grain tank FmX Integrated Display User Guide 399 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 9 Select the Crop tab General o owo o Standard Moisture 15 5 10 Inthe Crop Type drop down list select the crop type 11 Inthe Standard Moisture field enter the market value 12 Inthe Crop Weight field enter the market value Note The Standard Moisture and Crop Weight values are not the calibration values 13 Select the Theme tab General Crop High Yield 300 00 bwn Low Yield 100 00 bwa High Moisture 25 00 o oc x 14 Inthe High Yield field enter a value 15 Inthe Low Yield field enter a value 16 Inthe High Moisture field enter a value 400 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 17 Inthe Low Moisture field enter a value 18 Tap OK Configuring the YM 2000 Yield Monitor 1 6 Install the Yield Monitoring plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 From the Configuration screen select the Yield Monitoring plugin and then tap Setup The Yield Monitoring Settings screen appears Select the General tab In the Yield Monitor drop down list select Ag Leader YM 2000
160. ad width FmX Integrated Display User Guide 405 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin This is useful for areas with no crops or areas where another combine may have harvested gt 1 Buttons pressed harvesting and logging works as usual A green icon appears on the button when harvesting Vey 2 Press on the sections row 7 A red button appears The map shows a reduced swath area by an amount 1 6th per button rN 3 The button turns gray when the active rows overlap previously harvested areas Information screen There is no change when logging is disabled 9999990090000 90 05879 999909990909990939 The following are status items that can be added on the Information screen Yield Status screen item Description Average yield per bin and per field Displays the average dry yield in bushels per acre Bin moisture Displays the average grain moisture of the bin Dry weight per bin and per field Displays the amount of crop harvested in metric tonnes pounds or imperial tons of grain Field moisture Displays the average grain moisture Grain flow Displays the dry bushels per hour you are harvesting Header height Displays a number to indicate the position of the head This number is not in feet or inches but is a number that is relative to the height of the header Instant moisture Displays the instantaneous grain moisture
161. ading Direction of travel with respect to true North decimal degrees Swath_Num Current swath headland number Offline Offline distance from swath center line meters Along_Line Along line distance from start of swath meters Note Attribute Not Populated Swath_Wdth Swath width meters AppIn_Wdth Application width meters Units Units metric Note Attribute Not Populated Field_Name The name of the field Target The target rate at the current position As_Applied Applied rate Note Attribute Not Populated Pitch The pitch Note Attribute Not Populated Roll The roll Note Attribute Not Populated Yaw The yaw Note Attribute Not Populated Total_Qty Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the Aerial Flow Controller Autocal Flow controller and Crophawk Flow Meter Relative_Height Height meters The Status items are segments of information that can be displayed on the Run screen The information appears in four different locations e In two locations at the top of the screen On aslide out tab at the left of the screen The slide out tab overlies the main screen but is transparent so that you can still see guidance underneath it To extend the slide out tab tap the end of the tab on the left of the screen FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 77 4 Display Setup The slide out tabs automatically slide back in when the specified time out value is reached To clo
162. adjust EZ Steer performance If you are not an advanced user Trimble recommends that you follow the numbered tabs to adjust the steering parameters See Calibrating and setting the EZ Steer parameters page 141 EZ Steer Steering Performance Go Anje Per Tern Current Warming 0900000000909000000009090000 Heading Speed Step 1 Step 2 Step3 Advanced Onire Aggressiveness Freeplay Offset Cross Track Error History Offtine Distance Average Offtine sy LJ sy 3 Inthe Advanced tab make the required changes and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears Operating the EZ Steer system with the FmX integrated display Engage options The Engage Options tab enables you to control the system s engage and disengage behavior if you need to change the automatically populated settings 1 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Setup The EZ Steer Settings screen appears 2 Select the Engage Options tab The following options appear Option Description Minimum speed Maximum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit the system disengages Maximum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit the system disengages Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a
163. age 465 Viewing raw serial data You can view raw serial data as the display receives it This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal To view the raw serial data 1 From the Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Diagnostics Connector A Connector C Serial Sent vev Serial Sent 2472 vee Received Received 6029 CAN Devices 1 Connector B Sent 0 Sent o Received 0 Received 14 CAN Devices 0 error 105 This screen shows each of the connectors ports on the FmX harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received FmX Integrated Display User Guide 465 24 Troubleshooting 2 To view the raw data from a port tap the appropriate View button The port diagnostics screen for that port appears The screen shows either ASCII text or Hex code depending on which button you select Tap ASCII to view incoming data from the NMEA data string The Hex code is for engineering use only The data appears only when tap Capture A virtual LED on the Capture button flashes to show that data is being sent or received on that serial port To view the data tap ASCII or Hex and then tap Capture Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then appears on the screen You can review the data or capture another snapshot Note Data shown in green is incoming data data shown in red is outgoing data Restoring default settings You can re
164. an office computer All field data collected by the FmX integrated display is saved onto the USB memory stick To transfer data to an office computer 1 Remove the USB memory stick from the FmX integrated display 2 Insert the USB memory stick into your office computer CAUTION If you place the files in a series of folders the combined filename and folder path may become too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files To avoid this Trimble recommends that you place data in your computer s C folder 3 Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows Explorer This copies all the sub folders and files in the folder Note When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer you must keep all the shape files dbf shp and shx together so that office software can open the theme file To ensure that the files stay together always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files If you create a new event in a field and you already have the Field folder containing any previous events on the office computer you should still copy the Field folder so that the new EventHistory information is copied across CAUTION If you use the same farm field or event names on more than one display you could accidentally overwrite existing files when you copy data to the office computer To prevent this create a separate folder for each unit For example C AgGPSFMD_
165. anes 2 E gt Autopilot Data 2 O Smith Farms O Meadowbrook South Field O Planing Spraying gt Diagnostics Autopilot Sceenshots BP E AgGPS Prescriptions Fle Edt View Favorites Tools Helo Qa O P ra E rowers 5 KID E AgGPS Prescriptions 3 Lime Press Westfield 19 dbf a Lume Prese WestField 19 sho T Lime Presc WestFiek 19 shx 456 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Copying or deleting data files The Data Files screen enables you to copy or delete card data It shows the fields varieties prescriptions and data dictionaries that are in the internal memory and on the USB memory stick On the FmX integrated display there are two methods to access the Data Files screen See the following sections Accessing data files from the Home screen page 457 Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen page 457 Accessing data files from the Home screen From the Home screen tap Data Files The Data Files screen appears Accessing the data files through the Configuration screen 1 2 3 4 5 From the Home screen tap x On the Current Configurations screen tap Configure On the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup Ifnecessary enter the administration password and then tap OK Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 457 23
166. ant health and vigor NDVI NIR_reflected Red_reflected NIR_reflected Red_reflected NUE Nitrogen Use Efficiency A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant For example an NUE of 60 means that 6 Ibs of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 lbs applied For more information go to www nue okstate edu NRS Nitrogen Rich Strip This reference strip area allows for determining the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment mineralization etc and importantly this year s expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen RI Response Index Provides an indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional N VI Vegetation Index A value that is calculated or derived from sets of remotely sensed data that is used to quantify plant health stress and vigor VRA Variable Rate Application Based on information supplied to a rate controller the rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied 316 FmX Integrated Display User Guide GreenSeeker primary components The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 GreenSeeker RT200 with FmX integrated display components GreenSeeker E Power switch sensors Item Description Trimble part number 1 FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX basic power cable 67258 8 m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 50449 AG25 GNSS ant
167. ark on the field Note You do not have to drive over a benchmark to delete it Up Arrow Raise the blade by the Blade Step amount Down Arrow Lower the blade by the Blade Step amount Auto Engage automatic blade height control e starts the slope calculation e resets the height e resets the cut fill Coarse Use the Up and Down arrows to change the blade height by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables you to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Logging Log the coverage so that you can see on the map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information The slope is defined as the percentage vertical drop against horizontal travel A positive slope goes upwards and a negative slope goes downward For example if the slope is set to 1 the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled Vertical drop Actual slope 1 1 ft Horizontal travel 100 ft 202 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 To view or change the Point and Slope gradient tap Edit on the FieldLevel II tab Alternatively tap the or buttons to move the slope by the Slope Adjust amount defined in the FieldLevel settings under Leveling model Point and Slope Slope Adjust Driving in Autoslope mode The Autoslope leveling model can be used for both tile and ditching applications For tile appli
168. ary blade GPS receiver The time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary FieldLEvel GPS receiver P Correction Type The correction type used by the primary blade receiver P Cut Fill The difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height P Design Height The height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height plus minus symbol the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green P Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line P Distance Traveled For use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode The distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled FmX Integrated Display User Guide 81 4 Display Setup Item Description P East P GPS Status The distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin
169. ary blade receiver FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Item Description S Cut Fill The difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height S Design Height The height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height plus minus symbol the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green S Distance Traveled For use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode The distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled S East The distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point S GPS Status The GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is currently using S H Error Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions S HDOP The Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver A measure of
170. ated Display User Guide 185 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins 186 The design slope values show the angles and heading of the slope Item Description East gt West Slope The angle of the design slope from East to West North gt South Slope The angle of the design slope from North to South two angles above are combined Composite Slope The true angle of fall of the design This is the angle of the slope when the Slope Heading The heading direction of the slope when the two slopes are combined The icon beside each slope option shows the direction of the slope East gt West Slope 1 6223 Because this is a negative slope it drops from East to West The Stats table at the top left of the screen shows field information The volumes will balance out Item Description Cut The volume of dirt that must be cut for the current design Fill The volume of dirt that must be added for the current design Note If the Cut and Fill values are the same you will only be moving dirt The system includes the Cut Fill Ratio when configuring these amounts Area The area of the field inside the boundary The image of the field on the left of the screen can show one of two things e When the Height button is selected the image shows the topographical height of the field AV e When the Cut Fill button is selected the image shows where dirt needs to be rem
171. aterial Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Pow Monitor q gt Setting Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 301 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that
172. ates around Antenna front back Measured from the implement working point to the center of the GPS antenna if mounted Antenna left right Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the GPS antenna if mounted Antenna height The working height of the GPS antenna FmX Integrated Display User Guide 335 12 The TrueGuide Plugin Setting up the TrueGuide system 1 From the Configuration screen select the TrueGuide plugin and then tap Setup 2 Enter the required global settings Setting Description Roll compensation On Applies roll corrections from the tractor Off Applies no roll corrections Aggressiveness CurveGuide e Off The system does not anticipate curves e TrueGuide only Enables the system to anticipate curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance only e Always On Keeps CurveGuide on at all times TrueGuide Sets the default aggressiveness the recommended aggressiveness is 100 For more information see TrueGuide system aggressiveness settings page 341 Rear axle to hitch point Enter the distance between the fixed axle for conventional tractors or the center of rotation for tracked tractors and the draw bar 3 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears 336 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin 12 Calibrating the TrueGuide implement guidance system To calibrate the TrueGuide system you must have a field open
173. ation e Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid nozzles Field IQ section control module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves e Variety tracking Sprayer e Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve e Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles Field IQ Section Control Module s needed using existing boom shutoff valves or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Strip till liquid e Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual sections Field IQ Section Control Module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves e Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives connected to fixed displacement pumps such as CDS John Blue piston pumps to change liquid rate Field lIQ Rawson Control Module s needed e Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and flow meter Spreading e Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive Field IQ Rawson Control Module s needed e Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and application rate sensor Air seeder e Section Control of up to 96 rows of blockage sensors e Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with manual rate or prescription e Control existing PWM linear actuators or servo systems e Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed bin level air pressure and implement switches Definitions Term Definition Material A product that is
174. ations list select Yield Calibrations LS 7 Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest 6 Follow the steps to perform the calibration Updating the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only Downloading Version 1 20C from Stellar Support 1 Goto wwwstellarsupport com 2 Select Support amp Downloads in the left column 3 Select Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column 4 Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software 5 Select Run in the file download security warning 6 Once the download is complete choose the preferred language and press OK 7 Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original Greenstar monitor 412 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Loading version 1 20C to the Moisture Sensor 1 Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor 2 Power on the Greenstar monitor 3 Press INFO 4 Select KeyCard gt 5 Select Program Target gt 6 Select Harvest Monitor Combine gt PF347112 Version 1 12 7 Select Moisture 1 12J gt 8 Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete FmX Integrated Display User Guide 413 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 414 FmX Integrated
175. bove Field IQ Calibration z FmX Integrated Display User Guide 309 10 The Field IQ Plugin 3 Select Drive Calibration and then tap OK The Drive Calibration screen appears The Drive Calibration screen has the following tabs Tab Description Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration Enter the following values Allowable Error Gain Minimum Response 310 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Note For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer refer to the support note Field IQ crop Input Control System For Sprayers and Spreaders 4 5 6 Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK The Flow Calibration screen appears In the Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen enter the Flow Meter type the Flow Meter Calibration and the Minimum Flow Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions Operating in the field i 2 From the Home screen tap H From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 311 10 Th
176. buttons on the Mapping tab FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a curved FreeForm section 1 Tap Define FF The FreeForm buttons change 2 Tap FreeForm to begin drawing a FreeForm line The line ay follows the path of the vehicle El a i 3 To complete the FreeForm pattern do one of the following De select the FreeForm button Perform a U turn Note If you are driving an inward spiral leave the FreeForm button selected The segments will continue to be defined Creating a straight FreeForm section 1 Tap Define FF The FreeForm buttons change 2 Drive to the start point of the line and then tap Set A 3 Drive to the other end of the line and then tap Set B The guidance line appears Switching between FreeForm sections You can switch snap between the different FreeForm sections In the following example there are 2 FreeForm sections Item Description 1 A straight FreeForm AB Line selected 2 A curved FreeForm section You may want guidance along either line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 57 3 Getting Started 58 To snap between one section and another tap the Next Path button on the Run screen If the Next Path button is not available tap Back and then tap Next Path Guidance jumps to the next section To cycle through the available sections keep tapping Next Path Note This selects a curve only if
177. calculate the Lead Time setting divide the distance between the points in inches from Step 5 by the vehicle speed in inches second Half the distance between points inches Lead Time seconds Speed inches second Enter the lead time on the Remote Output screen Remote Output For example if a 4 mph pass creates a 14 distance between each set of points a Divide the distance between the points by 2 In this example 14 2 7 b Convert the speed from mph to inches second 4 mph 4 x 17 6 70 4 inches second c Divide the halved distance between the points by the speed 7 inches 0 099 Lead Time in seconds 70 4 inches second d Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points e Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another If the gap between the points is unacceptable repeat the calibrations FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Serial Data Input Plugin In this chapter When serial data input is activated the FmX integrated display can receive and log NMEA messages from an external device for example m Configuring serial data input an infra red sensor m Connecting serial data input This chapter explains how to configure the display to receive data FmX Integrated Display User Guide 385 16 The Serial Data Input Plugin Connecting serial data input To connect
178. cations the system runs on both self propelled tile machines and pull type plows towed behind a tractor For ditching applications the Autoslope system works with any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by the FieldLevel II system Note When the system is not running in Auto mode the virtual lightbar or LB25 lightbar will guide to any existing A B line allowing you to use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a constant spacing When driving in Autoslope mode the FieldLevel II tab appears as follows Tap To Design Set the Autoslope constraints for your tile or ditch design Finalize the design before installing the tile or cleaning the ditch Note A white cross is displayed on the run screen showing both horizontal and vertical location See screenshot below table Up arrow Raise the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Down arrow Lower the tile boot or blade by the Blade Step amount Recalculate from here When the tile plow encounters a rock pull the boot up over the rock then press Recalculate From Here This will modify the design to ensure that the rest of the tile run stays within the minimum slope requirement preventing the pipe from diving down to the original design grade Note This feature works only when installing tile in the direction away from the outlet point Coarse When selected pressing the Up or Down arrows will move the blade by the
179. ccuracy the GPS antenna and receiver are mounted on the vehicle and it is the vehicle that is guided On flat ground the implement will probably be directly behind the vehicle but in the following conditions the implement can pull draft to one side e On side slopes e Invariable soil conditions e On curved guidance patterns The stand alone Autopilot automated steering system has no way to detect or correct for implement draft FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 In these conditions the draft distance can be significant enough to lose repeatability for successive field operations despite the 25 mm 1 inch accuracy of the tractor equipped with the Autopilot system Benefits of the TrueTracker system The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot system You must unlock and install the second FmX integrated displays internal receiver on the implement Using the Trimble T3 inertial terrain compensation technology and the accuracy of the receiver the TrueTracker system can steer the implement ensuring it remains online behind the vehicle even on extremely sloped ground The TrueTracker system supports the following Steering in reverse Straight and curved guidance patterns Independent implement offset Independent aggressiveness control for the implement Zero steering to center the coulters Requirements of the TrueTracker system An Autopilot syst
180. ce strip tap Ref drive the reference strip and then tap Ref again to end recording FmX Integrated Display User Guide 323 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin 5 To record NDVI data from the non reference strip tap Non Ref drive the non reference strip and then tap Non Ref again to end recording Note As the NDVI is collected the data is stored in respective fields on the GreenSeeker calibration page Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data stopping in one location affects the average values The Ref and Non Ref buttons change to a lighter color when selected or active 6 Tap Done GreenSeeker Calibration Cal You now see the values that were collected in Step 4 and Step 5 Notes To collect fresh data from this screen tap the Non Ref or Reference buttons You will not see the new values until you deselect the respective button To manually override or input data select the various fields and then use the screen keypad The Reference values in the Maximum Average and Minimum fields are also available for the Auto Calibration function on the Algorithm tab 324 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 7 When you are satisfied with the data select the Algorithm tab GreenSeeker Calibration e7 8 Select either an existing algorithm or Custom Table to create a new algorithm from the Formula list For more information see Defining a Custom Table page 327 Note The formula selected for yo
181. ch wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 307 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field IQ Setup aT Setting Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override Speed This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Boundary Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled By Rate Snapping Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the
182. city Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 235 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements e Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Applica
183. cle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver The height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height plus minus symbol the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green P Vertical Error Estimate P Up The height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point P VDOP The Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better The current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Pressure The current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor Productive Area Radio Signal Strength The area of Area Features that are designated as productive The DCM 300 wireless signal strength S Altitude The current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Blade Height The current height of the secondary blade S CMR Percent The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Correction Age The time since the GPS corrections were last received from the secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver S Correction Type 82 The correction type used by the second
184. cond when you turn off Auto mode Remote Input You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto mode This remote is Auto controlled with the Remote Input Auto setting Configuring relative heights for all leveling models By default relative heights are enabled meaning coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark For field leveling or data collection you can set relative offsets so that the coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark You can set offsets in any of the following directions e The X axis e The Y axis e The height The Relative Heights tab of the FieldLevel II Setup screen shows the following items Item Description Relative Select Enabled to use relative heights from the master benchmark Choose Disabled Heights to use GPS heights at all times Relative X If relative heights are enabled this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Relative Y If relative heights are enabled this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Height Offset If relative heights are enabled this is the height value that will be applied to the master benchmark Force If Force Rebench is set to Yes and the field has been closed and opened again the Rebench system will not let you start work until you have re benched Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions If
185. controlled by a PWM valve Servo valve or Rawson drive You can use a planter seed liquid granular seed and granular fertilizer all of which have different set up parameters Section A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut off valve Tru Count air clutches or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves A section can have either a single row nozzle or multiple rows nozzles depending on how the system is set up Row The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter This can be controlled individually as a single row section or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section 224 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Units of measure Type Unit Symbol Description Seed Metric kS ha Thousands of seeds per hectare US Imperial kS a Thousands of seeds per acre Granular seed Metric kg ha Kilograms of seed per hectare US Imperial Ibs a Pounds of seed per acre Liquid application Metric L ha Liters per hectare US Imperial Gal a Gallons per acre Granular fertilizer Metric kg ha Kilograms of fertilizer per hectare US Imperial Ibs a Pounds of fertilizer per acre Installing the Field IQ hardware For information on installing the Field IQ crop input control system on your implement refer to e Field IQ Platform Installation Instructions e Tru Count Air Clutch Installation Instructions e Rawson Installation Instructions
186. controller Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Press the button and hold it down while turning on the controller 2 In the Setup screen scroll to GPS and then select No Note Pressing and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the FmX integrated display Amazone Amatron To use the Amazone Amatron you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Note Connect the cable to the pinned connector on the lower left side of the Amatron controller Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Press Shift Page Setup Page 2 2 Set RS232 to 57600 baud FmX Integrated Display User Guide 375 14 376 The Serial Rate Control Plugin LH5000 To use the LH 5000 controller you need a special adapter cable LH Agro P N 198 701 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Press Return Return Fertil Distrib Select Type LH500 Accept Setting any
187. controller If the controller is set at a sloped angle the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation Note Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions If custom angles are used the on screen image of the controller does not appear 3 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit FmX Integrated Display User Guide 113 5 114 Vehicle Guidance Options Configuring the manual override sensitivity Manual Override sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required One way to disengage the Autopilot system is to turn the steering wheel This is called the Manual Override When you turn the steering wheel there is a voltage spike that then tapers off This spike and decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs and the system disengages The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering can be engaged again e Ifyou set a high level of sensitivity the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer before you can re engage e Ifyou set a low level of sensitivity the system will take longer to disen
188. cord keeping information To add the following categories tap Event Attributes Item Description Operator name The name of the vehicle operator Operator EPA The vehicle operator s EPA license number for spreading restricted use or state restricted pesticides or herbicides Harvest Year The year that the crop is going to be harvested Farm Location The country or region where the farm is located FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Item Description Vehicle The vehicle used in the operation Implement The implement connected to the vehicle Application Method The application method used for example spraying seeding or harvesting Wind speed The average wind speed Wind gust speed The maximum speed of any wind gusts Wind direction The average wind direction Sky conditions The amount of cloud cover Soil conditions A description of the state of the soil Soil type A description of the soil type in the field Temperature The current temperature Relative humidity The humidity percentage Crop The crop grown in this field Target pests If spraying the pest that the spray targets Custom 1 Additional information of your choosing Custom 2 Additional information of your choosing Custom 3 Additional information of your choosing Custom 4 Additional information of your choosing Material The material
189. coverage logging m Changing the password m Saving the vehicle configuration m Saving a PDF version of the current field Upgrading the FmX integrated display firmware Upgrading the Field IQ system firmware Unlocking additional devices Once you complete the basic configuration you can e Use this chapter to configure more advanced features for higher accuracy or better performance e Begin driving See Getting Started Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When the display prompts you to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 433 22 Advanced Configuration Configuring remote coverage logging 434 You can configure the FmX integrated display to control coverage mapping by using a switch on the implement instead of the button on the Run screen Installing the logging option To connect an implement switch to the FmX integrated display and configure the display to use the switch to control the logging install a switch on the implement to allow for correct switch activation when the implement is raised or lowered For example a switch similar to the Trimble P N 60477S shown below can be used to activate the coverage logging The switch must make and break the connection on pins 10 and 11 on the FmX port connector For example to use the 60477S
190. culture application or activity on a particular field see above For example e Planting of seed e Application of fertilizer or lime e Spraying with fungicide herbicide or insecticide Each client may have several farms each of the farms may consist of several fields and each field may be broken into a number of events FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 27 2 Display Overview Using the FmX integrated display 28 Turning on the display Briefly hold down the power button for approximately half a second The display turns on and after a pause the Home screen appears The FmX integrated display has three main screens e Home screen e Configuration screen e Run screen To access each of these screens tap the appropriate button on the right of the display For more information see Control buttons page 24 Turning off the display Close all fields before you turn off the system To close a field see Closing a field page 44 There are several ways to turn off the display e Return to the Home screen and then tap Shutdown e Hold down the power button on the reverse of the display for approximately half a second Note There is sometimes a short delay between the time when you tap the power button and when the display turns off This is because the display is saving settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Home screen D a am Display Trimble The Home scre
191. cut fill and height information The FieldLevel II height indicators show you whether to raise or lower the blade so the contour remains at the same level 1 Inthe Run screen drive the vehicle to where you want to start the first levee and then set the master benchmark at this point 2 Set which side of the vehicle is uphill Tap Guide drive the vehicle forward following the lightbar to keep the vehicle on the same contour To move to the next levee turn the vehicle around and change the Up Hill direction To step the blade up or down use the and and v buttons to achieve the required offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade 214 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Tandem Dual plugin Tandem scraper configuration The tandem scraper configuration describes the practice of towing two scrapers one behind the other This type of leveling provides increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from the other This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt from the scraper buckets Primary GPS Secondary GPS antenna antenna Tandem Scraper system Dual scraper configuration The dual scraper configuration describes a single scraper with two GPS antennas one at each end of the blade This allows for control of the roll of the blade giving a more accurate surf
192. d it to the modem When the modem is successfully unlocked a message appears on the FmX display reboot the modem Activating the DCM 300 modem The DCM 300 modem is available with either an HSDPA modem for use with GSM cellular networks globally or an EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the United States Trimble offers services for the DCM 300 modem that can be purchased from a Trimble store Services include the VRS Now Ag correction service Sync data transfer Dispatch asset tracking and wireless data plans USA only FmxX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Configuring the DCM 300 modem 1 Install the VRS plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 2 To use VRS corrections the GPS Setup tab must be configured with a Correction type of Trimble VRS Note The FmX display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type 3 From the Configuration screen select the VRS plugin and then tap Setup The VRS Configuration screen appears 4 From the Device drop down list select the type of modem that is connected The default is DCM 300 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 419 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 420 5 Select the VRS Server Setup tab 6 Enter the required settings as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator as described below Internet base setting Desc
193. d on a Cat MT 700 800 series equipped with the ISO option Common calibration items You can calibrate several aspects of the vehicle The calibrations that are available depend on which components are installed in the vehicle and system Four calibration options appear for all types of vehicle Note You must perform the Controller Orientation and the Roll Correction calibrations Option Description Controller Orientation Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle Manual Override Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable Roll Antenna Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor Compensation variations in the Autopilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting Line Acquisition How aggressively the vehicle approaches the guidance line For articulated and front wheel steered vehicles three additional calibration options appear FmX Integrated Display User Guide 111 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Note The steering sensor and automated steering dead zone procedures are required The steering sensor calibration must be performed first Option Description Steering Sensor Converts the sensor output into commands for steering full left full right and any position in between Automated
194. dad Beh behead 99 POWER IMAMASCITIEIE e isana Aone erage dae ase PSA a thee SS Edda a aed 100 Time ZONE 4 5 4s cae Be a SSA a ee a ee oe Ba ee Oe BSS ee 101 Signal input module for an OEM switch interface 0 0 0005 101 Vehicle Guidance Options 22002022 e eee eee 103 Mantial puidance e2 3 5 40 eer ee BA Ge he ee E ee ea Deh aes 104 Configuring the GPS receiver soss recedit esia aa ee eee 105 Run screen for manual guidance n os ee ee eee 105 Autopilot automated steering system guidance eee ee ee eee 106 Configuring the Vehicle tab 2 1 eee eee eee 106 Configuring the Engage tab 1 ee eee 107 Configuring the Steering tab nanasan uaaa 107 Configuring the Advanced tab 1 0 0 cee ee eee 109 Selecting the vehicles a mod ai doia sas ia dod a a iiae Ae a eer eh Rae 109 Autopilot calibration cs sesidir eee een bi ee eee 111 Common calibration items easa 111 Calibrating the Autopilot option n s s asana 112 Configuring the controller orientation sasaaa aaea 113 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Contents Configuring the manual override sensitivity 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 114 Calibrating the AutoSense device 2 ee eee 116 Calibrating the steering angle sensor 2 0 cee eee ee ee 116 Calibrating the automated steering deadzone 000 eee eee 119 Calibrating the proportional steering gain 2 2 ee ee ee 121 Configu
195. dicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License Warranty Remedies Trimble sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be at Trimble s option to repair or replace any Product that fails to conform to such warranty Nonconforming Product and or issue a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product excluding costs of installation upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble s product return procedures than in effect Such remedy may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to third party equipment onto which the Product is installed if such damage is found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by Trimble following a root cause analysis Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to t
196. dow enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths For example if you enter 2 the headland will be 2 swaths wide 3 Tap New Headland The Run screen appears with the headland definition buttons on the Mapping tab 4 Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap Record A red line appears behind the vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded Note You must define the inner pattern before you complete the headland 5 To define the inner pattern tap Infill The Mapping tab changes to show the inner pattern buttons Ea gB m Note Once infill lines have been created they cannot be moved 6 When you reach where you want the A point tap Set A 7 Doone of the following Tocreate an internal AB Line drive to where you want the B point at least 50 m 164 ft and then tap Set B Tocreate an internal A line tap Use A 8 Tap Back to HL The buttons on the Mapping tab change back to their original appearance When you complete the headland circuit the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle back to the start point so drive the vehicle to a position on the headland circuit where a straight line back to the start will not cut off part of the pattern 9 Tap Close HL The new headland appears 54 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a pivot 1 From the Swath Management screen select the Pivot field pattern from the drop down l
197. e all components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement e the Field IQ plugin has been added to the FmxX integrated display configuration See Adding or removing a plugin page 170 e the implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation such as planting or spraying See Chapter 7 Implement Configuration The Field IQ Setup Wizard The FmX integrated display contains a Field IQ Setup Wizard that steps you through setting up the Field IQ system You must enter accurate values on each screen of the wizard to ensure that the system operates correctly To navigate the wizard e Tap Next to proceed to the next screen e Tap Back to return to the previous screen e To enter a number or a name tap in the blank field to open the virtual keypad or keyboard FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Note When you have completed the setup wizard once the Next button is replaced with OK You can then view each tab by tapping it on the screen To access the Field IQ setup wizard 1 Inthe Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Setup The Material Overview screen appears Material Overview 2 EE O00U0OONN The Material Overview screen displays the materials that are currently set up to be applied with the Field IQ system 2 Do the following Tap To Add add and set up a new material Edit view or edit the de
198. e The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Connect the FieldLevel II plugin primary antenna to the GPS1 connector on the rear of the display and connect the Tandem Dual plugin secondary antenna to the GPS2 connector on the rear of the display The correct configuration for the antennas on the implement s is as follows FmX integrated display Plugin Receiver position Receiver position port Tandem set up Dual set up GPS1 FieldLevel II Front Left GPS2 Tandem Dual Rear Right Step 3 Configuring the primary receiver The FieldLevel II plugin controls the primary receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver listed below the Field Level plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select Internal Primary 3 From the Corrections drop down list select RTK 4 Set the Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 217 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Step 4 Configuring the secondary receiver The Tandem Dual plugin controls the secondary receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver listed below the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select Internal Secondary Step 5 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin The FmX integrated display must be configured to control the Tandem Dual plugin in either a tandem configuration or a dual configuration
199. e Field Area Total Boundaries Area Total Time Operator EPA License TY ET L O ater E Loo Layer 1 UNKNOWN E vehicle O Implement width Application width 5o OS NOTE Totals are appronimate values and may not be acceptable for customer invoice Consult local laws and regulations for customer invoicing procedures some regions require official weighing FmX Integrated Display User Guide 437 22 Advanced Configuration The Event Summary file may include the following images of the field This image Shows the Overlap coverage and any overlaps Height vertical height of the GPS position Applied rate volume at which the spray boom applied solution GPS quality quality of the GPS signal Average XTE coverage layer degree of implement drift The file also shows information about The event e The vehicle setup Tap the appropriate buttons to show or hide coverage area and or area features If any Prescriptions are available a prescriptions button is also available To view a summary report on an office computer 1 Remove the CompactFlash card from the display and then insert it into an office computer 2 Select the folder AgGPS Summaries and then open the file Index html 3 Select the appropriate field from the list Note If you use the Microsoft Internet Explorer internet browser you may need to allow Activex technology to see all of the summary file Upgrading
200. e Field IQ Plugin Using the Diagnostics tab 1 Select the Field IQ plugin tab and then tap Diagnostics The following screen appears 2 To enable the sections tap the numbered section tabs above each of the section icons 3 The Operations tab displays the current status of Control Mode Auto or Manual Rate Switch Mode Manual Rate 1 or Rate 2 Master Switch Off On or Jump Start This screen also enables you to manually enter values for Tank Level Enter a new value or select Refill Tank Target Rate The required rate for the rate switch Decrease or increase Speed Decrease or increase Switches If you are using the optional Field IQ individual section switch box this screen indicates which switches have been assigned to each section To test this flip each switch in the section switch box The section it is assigned to appears gray View Error Log Shows all the errors that have occurred since the error log was cleared Section Test The system begins a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections 312 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 4 Operate the sprayer and check the value shown for the Applied Rate If necessary adjust the Aggressiveness setting to achieve the desired rate Operations Hardware Sensor oni eee ee Tank teve 423 43 gal Refil Tank Rate Switch Mode Rate 2 won ES Current Flow 0 00 gal min Control Speed 5 0 mph speed So
201. e On speed list select either Normal Low or Ultra Low Under normal operating speeds this should be set to Normal For vehicles operating at very slow speeds this should be set to Low or Ultra Low Display speed thresholds Setting Speed threshold Normal gt 0 4 m s 1 3 ft s Low gt 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s Ultra Low gt 0 02 m s 0 07 ft s Note The Autopilot NavController I must have firmware version 5 10 or later to support the Low and Ultra Low settings 7 Inthe Legacy Sensors list select either None Wheel Speed Only Gear Lever Only or Wheel and Gear Note The Legacy Sensors list is only available when the Autosense setting is set to Off FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the Advanced tab Vehicle Engoge Steering Advanced TAP n E C E Note For more information on how to utilize the features in the Advanced tab contact Trimble Support Tap OK The Autopilot controller is now configured Selecting the vehicle 1 Inthe Vehicle tab on the Vehicle Controller Setup screen tap Edit Vehicle Profile Location trom Database new Y ne iy FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 109 5 Vehicle Guidance Options There are a number of pre configured profiles for the various vehicle makes and models You can load them from Autopilot controller The majority of vehicle profiles are stored on the Autopilot
202. e Point creation date YYYYMMDD UTC_Time UTC time hh mmiss s Local_Time Local time hh mm ss s Logging_On Coverage logging Flag 1 o0n O off On or off Auto_Steer Auto Steer Flag 1 o0n 0 off On or off GPS_Status GPS status value 1 to 12 Status_Text GPS status description Num_Stats Number of GPS satellites DOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision a measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age seconds Ant_Lat Antenna latitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Ant_Long Antenna longitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Height Mean sea level height of ground meters Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters FmX Integrated Display User Guide 451 23 452 Data Management Column Field description Units notes Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters Speed GPS derived ground speed kph Heading Direction of travel with respect to true North decimal degrees Swath_Num Current swath headland number Offline Offline distance from swath center line meters Along_Line Along Line distance from start of swath meters Swath_wdth Swath width meters AppIn_Wdth Application width meters Units Units metric Field_Name The name of the field Target The target rate at the current position Pitch The pitch Roll The roll Yaw The yaw Target The target application rate when serial rate control TAC or Field IQ are used As applied The actual
203. e Step 3 tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line Engage the system on the A B line Vehicle is offline Do the following To the left Increase the freeplay offset to the right To the right Increase the freeplay offset to the left Note Ifyou are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto Low Note The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available To access these options select the EZ Steer plugin Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen 7 8 Enter the parameters and then tap OK The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen appears Tap OK The Configuration screen appears EZ Steer plugin diagnostics The EZ Steer Diagnostics screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information l From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Diagnostics The EZ Steer Diagnostics screen appears This screen displays the roll and heading of the vehicle and the temperature of the steering control module EZ Steer Diagnostics e 1 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 143 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 2 Tap Steering Perf The EZ Steer Steering Performance screen appears This screen is for advanced users who understand how to
204. e blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model CH1 CH4 Product Level The current level of the products that are in channels 1 4 Client Name Name of the current client CMR Percent The percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds Control Speed The speed reported to the multi application controller Correction Age Correction Type The length of time since the last correction was received The correction type that is being used Coverage Percent The percentage of the field area that is covered area Current Flow The current flow of material Cut Fill The difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Design Height The height the blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height plus minus symbol the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location
205. e button 9090000909999900 0000000000 You can still access the Mapping plugin to add field features or create guidance lines Since there is no Autopilot system to control steering you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch the virtual lightbar for guidance FmX Integrated Display User Guide 105 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Autopilot automated steering system guidance Prior to configuration the Autopilot option must be installed on the FmX integrated display For more information see the FmX integrated display Plug ins Guide There are two stages to configuring the Autopilot option e Configure the vehicle select the current vehicle make and model e Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle Note The following configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed Configuring the Vehicle tab 1 From the Home screen tap K 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Controller Setup Q 4 Inthe Connector list select the port on the FmX integrated display that the Autopilot system controller is connected to 5 The Current Selection displays the current vehicle vdb profile that is loaded on the display To change this setting see Selecting the vehicle page 109 6 Inthe Vehicle Color list select the preferred color for the vehicle icon that appears on the Run screen
206. e button becomes available To create a design for the field tap the AutoPlane button The field points are processed and then the AutoPlane screen appears This screen shows field information and enables you to create the design for your field The AutoPlane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate the field surface elevations Once completed you can establish a design either by manually editing the slopes or by using the display to calculate a best fit plane The best fit calculation optimizes the height and slopes of a design plane to minimize the amount of dirt that has to be moved Once a design is completed and before you exit the AutoPlane design screen select the topographic height map or the cut fill color theme to transfer it to the Run screen with the design Options on the screen Item Description Cut Fill Ratio When you move dirt compaction or expansion can change the volume that it covers The Cut Fill Ratio is the amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt For example the default Cut Fill Ratio is 1 20 This means you lose 20 of your cut yards to compaction when you put the cut yards back down in the fill areas Section If you set up sections when you defined the field you can select one from the list Left Right list The section to the left of the section line or the section to the right of the section line FmX Integr
207. e design is saved in the field folder The design files are associated with the field so if you close the field and then open it again the design reloads with the field With RTK GPS the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to reestablish the height FieldLevel Il plugin 188 MultiPlane designs The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from MultiPlane design software MultiPlane software can run a wide range of what if scenarios enabling you to create complex designs with multiple field sections You can export these design control files and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in the office Leveling models In addition to AutoPlane and MultiPlane design support the FieldLevel II system has five leveling models e Point and Slope The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope regardless of the vehicle s direction This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage e Autoslope You define a section line and a set of constraints for the system to use to design either a tile or surface ditch profile The system will then install tile or cut a surface ditch to that design e Flat plane laser Use this leveling model to level
208. e information see Field Swaths shx folder page 447 Field boundary Polygon Boundary shp Boundary dbf Boundary shx ProgramLog old FmX integrated display logs FaultLog txt Autopilot faults service messages messages_ gz messages_ gz 1 9 Operating system logs core gz Debug data lt Date gt Coverage Series of polygons Coverage shp Event Coverage dbf For more information see Event Coverage shx folder page 449 Track Series of 3D points Track3D_ lt date time gt shp with attributes Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf Track3D_ lt date time gt shx Summary HTML lt eventname gt _Summary txt AgGPS summaries lt Client_Farm _Field_Event gt For more information see Event folder page 449 Diagnostic Folder files ProgramLog txt Diagnostics 444 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 Data Description Files folder Yield Yield points with TaskData xml TaskData attribute ID TLG lt xxxxx gt bin TLG lt xxxxx gt bin Autopilot config Vehicle cfg Diagnostics Autopilot System settings lt Preferences gt xml Diagnostics Preferences Screenshot_ lt num gt png Diagnostics screenshots The AgGPS folder The AgGPS folder stores system utility files and subfolders that contain the input and output files of the FmX integrated display See Prescriptions page 67 and Folders on the USB memory stick page 444 The following diagram shows system u
209. e page 162 Creating an implement L 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap A In the Configuration Selection screen tap the implement Switch If necessary enter the Administration password see Password access page 73 In the Implement Configuration screen tap New New Implement Current The New Configuration Name screen with a virtual keyboard appears Enter a name for the new implement and then tap OK For more information on configuring the implement see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 The Select Active Plugins screen appears Select the plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap OK The Implement Setup wizard appears Enter the appropriate information in each tab see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 Note The required information in the Implement Setup wizard varies depending on the plugins that you selected in Step 7 160 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 9 Implement Configuration 7 Tap OK Your current configuration now appears in the Configuration screen Selecting an existing implement To select a pre configured implement L 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap et In the Configuration Selection screen tap Implement Switch If necessary enter the Administration password See Password access page 73 In the Implement Configuration screen select the implement you want to switch to and then tap OK Note If there is only one available implem
210. e percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area FmX Integrated Display User Guide 237 10 The Field IQ Plugin Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Setting Description Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages 238 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Drive Setup Valve Setup tab The Field IQ Plugin 10 Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration Setting Description Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow Plumbing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase the application rate Bypass Valve is in the return to tank line The valve closes to increase the a
211. e roll offset correction Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it e Tire track offset method e Flag offset method Choose the method which best matches the conditions Calculating the roll offset Tire track offset method Tip Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction For best results use a RTK mode or OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at least twenty minutes If you do a roll calibration with less accurate GPS correction modes repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent result 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle 2 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the roll offset value to 0 zero 4 Create an AB Line 5 Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass 6 At the end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 7 Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass 8 In the middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line This ens
212. e selected 7 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating T2 roll compensation The EZ Steer system contains sensors that use T2 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump For roll compensation to work correctly the controller must be calibrated 1 Select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Calibrate Salect Vahicle Type Tractor 2WDIMFIWD olier Oriontaton fing Performance 2 Select Controller Orientation Set the image to match the controller orientation in the cab EZ Steer connectors point towards the rear of the vehicie FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 139 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 3 From the Orientation drop down list select the orientation of the SCM steering control module and then tap Next Rol Offset Park the vehicle and mark the inside position of both sets of p wheels eesee s gt h 4 Park the vehicle mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the first direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read 5 Turn the vehicle around ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in Step 4 and then tap Next Roll Offset Press OK to accept these setting
213. e terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all hird parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good aith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such unction or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose hat is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by his function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as se
214. eans 60 0 14 5 Flax 60 0 14 0 Grass seeds 14 0 14 0 Lentils 60 0 13 0 Lupines 60 0 12 0 Millet 50 0 14 0 Mustard 18 0 13 0 Navy beans 60 0 15 5 Oats 32 0 14 0 Peas 60 0 14 5 Popcorn 56 0 15 5 Rice 45 0 14 0 Rye 56 0 13 0 Safflower 45 0 13 0 Sorghum 56 0 13 0 Soybeans 60 0 13 0 Sunflower 25 0 14 0 Wheat durum 60 0 13 5 Wheat spring 60 0 13 5 Wheat winter 60 0 13 5 Optional grain Bushel weight is based on crop Moisture is based on crop choice choice The following crops appear in the list for 60 series combines only Peas Black eyed 60 0 15 5 Peas Field 60 0 10 Popcorn White 56 0 15 5 Popcorn Yellow 56 0 15 5 Rice Long 45 0 14 0 Rice Medium 45 0 14 0 Sunflower Oil 30 0 13 0 Sunflower Stripe 25 0 14 0 Wheat White 60 0 14 0 Wheat Spring HDRD 60 0 13 5 Wheat Winter HDRD 60 0 13 5 Wheat Winter STRD 60 0 13 5 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Configuring the John Deere Yield Monitor 1 Bl 3D OV ge Install the Yield Monitoring plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 From the Configuration screen select the Yield Monitoring plugin and then tap Setup The Yield Monitoring Settings screen appears Select the General tab In the Yield Monitor Type drop down list select the appropriate John Deere combine In the Combine Series drop down list select your combine series In the Port Connection drop down list choose Connector B Select the Stop He
215. eases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied e Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material Tap Setup to set alarm thresholds and adjust the way seed statistics are calculated e High Alarm Triggers when the rate reaches the selected percentage above the target for longer than the delay setting e Low Alarm Triggers when the rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay setting for the selected percentage e Singulation Low Triggers when singulation reaches a percentage lower than 100 for longer than the delay setting e Seeds When Off Triggers when this percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off for longer than the delay setting e No Seeds When On Triggers when this percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the delay setting
216. ection control module Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off after the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter th
217. ed Display User Guide Display Setup 4 3 To return to the Select Feature screen tap OK The new feature appears in the Point list 4 Select the new feature from the list and then tap OK The new feature appears on the button you selected 5 To exit tap OK Creating a line feature 1 Inthe Name field enter a name for the feature 2 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 3 To return to the Select Feature screen tap OK The new line feature appears in the Line list 4 Select the new feature in the list and then tap OK The new feature appears on the button you selected 5 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 91 4 Display Setup 92 Creating an area feature You can use area features to define areas of land as Productive or Unproductive If the sprayer passes into an area that is defined as unproductive the boom sections turns off This can be useful for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray for example waterways 1 Inthe Name field enter the name of the feature 2 Ifthe area feature will be a section of land that can be included in area calculations set the Productive Area button to Yes If it is unproductive land set the button to No 3 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 4 Ifa signal pin is attached to the system set the Remote Output button to Enabled This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area
218. ee 288 Material Setup Complete screen onna auauna 289 Calibrating the implement lift switch 0 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 289 Calibrating the Rawson modules for spreading 0 0 00 0 289 Calibrating the PWM valves 1 ee ees 293 Operating inthe field oes siasstitG ped hake he ks OE Re Sees 4 We S 298 Setting up the Field IQ system for Anhydrous 1 0 eee eee 299 Material tabr ss eaga e a ue Ae the oo ters Thee andl hoes Soon goatee 299 Layout tab rsisi resci 4 O84 4 doe dad eae Ry bebe adae ae bs eee as 301 Section Controltab ressas be Stk hed a io ey Gales Gd ta a Aye ay ae gas 302 Rate Control tabi 4 See aos eae Mew ea wee See ew ee owes 304 DOMSOFS GA 2a sacs de Acct de Sahar State yA S wat Sy ns Boos RL E E 307 Operation taD esai 242 dtdbac4vd as beaten teas so baden ted bod baad 308 Material Setup Complete screen 2 2 eee eee 308 Calibrating the implement lift switch 0 0 0 eee eee 309 Calibrating the modules 1 ee eee 309 Operating in the field s et 24 094 s aa a 82 Sees Case eke aoa Ee as oe Oa 311 Using the Diagnostics tabs 2 cassie apare Ce a a ae Oe ee ee be a 312 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin 1 2 315 Mirocin pao ACh Han Stages WS Rene heh yee diatom Some eA ace Sateen Ae 316 DeGnitions sw ee ee CANS ew Re os So DER EES See eS Bees 316 GreenSeeker primary components 2 eee ee ee ee 317 Interface module s s iuret ets See wR ARs E OR Reale ev ER Pe 318 GreenSeeker
219. ee eee eee 215 Tandem scraper configuration 2 1 ee ee 215 Dual scraper configuration 6 eee 215 Configuring the Tandem Dual plug 2206404 5s dade od doe PLEADS EER oo WE 216 Step 1 Configuring theimplement 0 0 0 eee ee eee 216 Step 2 Preparing the FmX integrated display and antennaconnections 216 Step 3 Configuring the primary receiver 1 0 aaau 217 Step 4 Configuring the secondary receiver 2 0 2 eee ee eee 218 Step 5 Configuring the Tandem Dual plugin 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 218 Step 6 Calibrating the Tandem Dual valve module 00005 219 Operating the Tandem Dual plugin aise ead ee eae ee ee Re ee ee Ee 220 The Field IQ Plugin es a eee eee we eS 223 I CROCUCHONs Hie artes a ants apie Baretta E E E Aaa Ae E A 224 Definitions s 204s au nie ba SSeS ER SEE EAS ead Re ee AES e Ree ESS 224 WITS OL MIC ASUNE sci csv a an AE E ern ey eae widen ey E ae can are hes 225 Installing the Field IQ hardware 1 0 eee ee ene 225 Field IQ master switch box functions 0 0 ee eee 226 Field IQ 12 section switch box optional 1 0 eee ee eee 227 Field IO Run SCreen s niaaa eS ae a ae anes Hee bce ok sean vi Ak Ge Wed 227 General s tip information 3 0 nh ee A OR ee ee a Me dae 230 The Field IQ Setup Wizard 1 2 ee eee 230 Linking materials ie siaaa ee 46k ae Dae a G e aa are Bie Ade a ao Sao es Oe aS 231 Setting up the Field IQ system for Plantin
220. een appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages 282 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Drive Setup Valve Setup tab The Field IQ Plugin 10 Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration Setting Description Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow Plumbing Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens to increase the application rate Bypass Valve is in the return to tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate Valve Behavior On Sections Closed Close When all sections ar off the control valve returns to the closed position Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve Master Valve closes when the system is turned off Dump Valve opens to dump flow to return line when the system is turned off Pump Disarming Switch Enable Select this option if you have a pump disarming switch installed Disable Select this option if you do not have a pump disarming switch installed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 283 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Setting Description Shaft Encoder Cons
221. egrated Display User Guide 291 10 The Field IQ Plugin 5 The next screen provides the status of each motor No Error The test was successful Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor 6 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen 292 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the PWM valves Drive Calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Field IQ Calibration screen has four tabs Tab Description Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 293 10 The Field IQ Plugin Tab Description Auto Tuning A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration 294 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plug
222. egrated display 2 Select your preferred map orientation in the Map Orientation drop down list Map orientation Example of view Description North Up When you perform a turn the field remains stationary and the vehicle turns Vehicle Up When you perform a turn the field rotates but the vehicle remains pointing up X Tip To change the map orientation from the Run screen tap the north arrow 3 Select the color scheme from the Color Scheme drop down list eeeeeeeeee ele e gt 0 2 5 1 57 mp 4 To create a save file for your work select On from the Save Summaries drop down list FmX Integrated Display User Guide 75 4 Display Setup Track Logging tab The Track Logging tab includes options to record the vehicle track at either a set time or a set distance Points along the track are logged at the greater of the two values logging time or logging distance To always log a point based on either of the two values set the other value to zero Setting both values to zero disables Track Logging Setting Description Distance 0 Time 0 Track logging is turned off Distance 1 Time 0 Track logging is recorded by distance m Distance 0 Time gt 1 Track logging is recorded by time s Distance gt 1 Time gt 1 Track logging is recorded by whichever setting is higher Track logging files Track logging files are created whenev
223. em with the FmX integrated display An unlock code for the FmX integrated display implement steering functionality Installing the TrueTracker system The TrueTracker system requires professional installation For more information contact your local Trimble reseller Configuration To configure the TrueTracker system complete the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 Activate the system See page 346 Configure the implement settings See page 346 Configure the implement controller See page 349 Configure the implement See page 351 Calibrate the implement See page 352 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 345 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 346 Activating the TrueTracker system Before you can use the TrueTracker system you must activate it on the FmX integrated display For step by step instructions see Entering the password to activate a plugin page 171 Note This process requires you to enter the activation password If you do not have an activation password contact your local Trimble reseller Configuring the implement settings l 2 3 From the Home screen tap He Tap the implement Edit button In the Configuration Selection screen ensure that the Autopilot option and the TrueTracker plugin are both installed See Adding or removing a plugin page 170 On the Configuration screen select the TrueTracker plugin and then tap Setup Configuring the Vehicle tab From the Connector list select the port that
224. ements e Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Setting Description Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 231 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 267 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section e Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use e Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section e Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control e Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section e Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module
225. en lists the following information about the display e The display build date firmware and hardware version e The Autopilot controller version date and serial number e The GPS receiver version correction source and subscription information e The selected vehicle make and model Note If you connect two Autopilot NavController I controllers the Home screen shows a summary of both controllers FmX Integrated Display User Guide 29 2 Display Overview Configuration screen The Configuration screen enables you to create edit and save various editable system settings and add or remove system options For more information on using the Configuration screen see Accessing the system configuration settings page 72 Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes 30 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Run screen 9000000000000 008I90 0000000000000 The Run screen shows the steering navigation If you select the Run screen and you have a field open the display shows that field If you select the Run screen when there is no field open the Field Selection screen appears Run screen view modes The FmX integrated display screen has two views for representing vehicle guidance on the Run screen e Overhead view Shows a bird s eye view o
226. engine at full throttle e Raise the implement Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is required e Overshoot exceeds 10 depending on the Tracker unit e Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops To calibrate the proportional steering gain 1 Select the Steering Gain procedure from the calibration list Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration e7 2 Tap Run Slew Test A warning message appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 357 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 3 Tap Next Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration e A CAUTION The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements 4 Tap Next in the two screens that appear next Test various gain settings while you monitor the implement steering performance and the values in the Slew Time and Overshoot fields for the Turn Left phase a Adjust the New Gain field if required 358 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 b Tap Turn Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and overshoot perce
227. enna 68040 00S 6 FMX FM 1000 to CAN w port replicator cable 75407 7 GreenSeeker to display cable 77704 RT200 interface module 900 1 047 30 RT200 power cable 400 1 276 10 20 RT200 interface module cable 400 1 277 oO 20 RT200 sensor cable 400 1 265 240 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 317 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Interface module The Interface Module contains circuitry to Weensecker interface boom mounted sensors with the FmX integrated display The interface module has CAN serial and power connections The module is an environmentally sealed enclosure which can be installed inside or outside the cab GreenSeeker sensors Reflectance readings are taken by the sensor These units generate their own illumination for use in any lighting condition day or night When the unit is on a red band of light will be observed directly below the rectangular sensor window The sensor is designed for an optimal height of 28 48 over the plant crop canopy to be sensed The field of view width of the sensor measurement is approximately 24 within the sensor s optimal height range Sensor mounting bracket Sensors are typically mounted to a standard stainless steel bracket supplied by Trimble These brackets are designed to fit most boom structures and are typically mounted with U bolts 318 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 Care and maintenance T
228. ent it is selected by default The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen For information on the settings see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 Importing an implement from the FieldManager display The FmX integrated display can import and use implements that were created in the FieldManager display To import an implement IO go cS OY Oto mM o Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB memory stick Insert the memory stick into the FmX integrated display and then turn on the display From the Home screen tap 4 In the Current Configurations screen tap Configure If necessary enter the Administration password See Password access page 73 In the Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup Select Data Files and then tap Manage Select Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap Copy The implements from the FieldManager display now appear in the Implement Configuration screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 161 7 Implement Configuration Adjusting the implement settings The implement setup screens contains five sections Section Definition Implement Type Describes the primary task for the current implement Measurements The basic information required for guidance using the EZ Steer system or the Autopilot system Geometry More detailed implement dimensions required for better
229. ent guidance system TrueGuide implement guidance must have e The Autopilot automated steering system installed on the tractor For instructions on how to install the Autopilot system see the Autopilot Automated Steering System Installation Instructions relevant to your vehicle e Stable implements Implements that are unstable such as sprayers with large flotation tires will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on the ground e Both the Autopilot option and the TrueGuide plugin activated on the FmX integrated display For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 TrueGuide implement setup Before using the FmX integrated display with the TrueGuide system plugin select and configure a new or existing implement For more information see Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Note You can update existing saved implements with implement geometry to support TrueGuide implement guidance Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement These offsets should be minimized whenever possible Settings on the Geometry tab are required for implement modelling When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system the following antenna offsets are required Offset Description Hitch to ground contact Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the point implement rot
230. er the set number of seconds Start Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Enter the distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area 256 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings Setting Description Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages FmX Integrated Display User Guide 257 10 The Field IQ Plugin Drive Setup Valve Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Val
231. er you open an event The track file records points at the rate defined in the Mapping screen see the previous section At each point a number of attributes are recorded The data stored in the track logging file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf is in metric units The information stored for each point in the track logging file is as follows 76 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Column Field description Units Version Track attribute file version UTC_Date Point creation date YYYYMMDD UTC_Time UTC time hh mmi ss s Local_Time Local time hh mm ss s Logging_On Coverage logging flag 1 o0n O off On or off Auto_Steer Auto Steer flag 1 0n 0 off On or off GPS_ Status GPS status value NMEA 1 2 5 4 Status_Text GPS status description Num_Stats Number of GPS satellites HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision A measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age seconds Ant_Lat Antenna latitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Ant_Long Antenna longitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Height Mean sea level height of ground meters Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters Note Attribute Not Populated Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters Note Attribute Not Populated Speed GPS derived ground speed kph Status items Display Setup 4 Column Field description Units He
232. ers Release Notice This is the April 2011 release Revision A of the FmX Integrated Display User Guide part number 93023 80 ENG It applies to version 5 11 of the FmX integrated display software Legal Notices The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights You may have others which vary from state jurisdiction to state jurisdiction Product Limited Warranty Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components the Product shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Trimble s applicable published specifications for the Product for a period of one 1 year starting from the earlier of i the date of installation or ii six 6 months from the date of original Product shipment from Trimble This warranty applies only to the Product ifinstalled by Trimble or a dealer authorized by Trimble to perform Product installation services Software Components All Product software components sometimes hereinafter also referred to as Software are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the Product and are not sold Any software accompanied by a separate end user license agreement EULA shall be governed by the terms conditions restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA notwithstanding the preceding paragraph During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such Fixes to the Product software that Trimble
233. essed to show the prescription rates at various sensor NDVI readings Depending upon what delivery system is used there will be actual minimum and maximum rates obtainable These will be dependent upon components like the pump control valve nozzles and boom plumbing sizes The GreenSeeker plugin for the FmX integrated display has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set regardless of the crop algorithm prescription Once a nozzle set is chosen the minimum should be set at the lowest rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern performance Maximum rates may be limited by rates that lessen atomization or drift FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 Selecting a nozzle It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower midrange of the typical rates shown on the application graph Ultimately it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate For example GreenSeeker Calibration oy Caltrain Algorithen Chan Output If most of your NDVI readings in the area of the field not in the NRS are around 0 53 and your review the application graph shows at 0 53 NDVI you should be applying 15GPA then you should choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12 5GPA at its lowest pressure e g 20psi and 21GPA at its highest pres
234. extension must be txt 2 Enter the body text 3 Copy the txt file to the AgGPS Data Dictionary folder on the display s USB memory stick On screen for example in the Client screen the file entries appear as shown below client J smith G wilson Farm MeadowsBr ook ABC Farms Field Field 1 Field 2 Back 40 Hogan Section Event Feature mapping MAE Fertilization Strip till Plant toperaton Bo Jim Chris Josh Jose Rob material 2 4 D Atrazine 35Y09 Mos NH3 460 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 To access the entries in the dictionary L 2 3 4 In the Field Setup screen tap New To view the available items tap the down arrow Select the appropriate item from the list Tap OK You can still enter new information as before but these entries are not added to the data dictionary To add items to the data dictionary edit the txt file on an office computer FmX Integrated Display User Guide 461 23 Data Management 462 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting In this chapter Advanced diagnostics Viewing raw serial data Restoring default settings Viewing FmX integrated display diagnostic information GPS Status screen Screen snaps m Forcing the system to turn off CHAPTER This chapter describes how to analyze proble ms that may occur with the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide
235. f the field with the vehicle in it FmX Integrated Display User Guide 31 2 Display Overview e Trailing view Shows a three dimensional representation of the field from the driver s perspective Item Description o Main view in this example overhead view 2 Auxiliary view trailing view To change the view mode tap the icons in the upper left of the run screen Zoom and Pan functions The FmX integrated display has five levels of zoom A close up view of the vehicle enables you to navigate more accurately while a long view enables you to see more of the field New in version 3 0 of the FmX integrated display is a pan function on the Run screen that gives you the ability to view the field outside of the normal viewing area 32 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Accessing the zoom and pan functions 1 To access the zoom and pan functions from the Run screen press B 2 To pan around the field press one of the four arrow icons positioned at the edge field area 3 To zoom in and out tap either the plus or minus symbol linked to the magnifying glass Note Tapping the field area of the Run screen when in zoom and pan mode turns the magnifying glass zoom feature on and off The fifth level of zoom in the pan view is a summary view of all your coverage It adjusts depending on the size of the field It does not include grid lines Tip If you
236. ficient movement was sensed for the calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Message Meaning Error Unable To Determine A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if DZ Try Again the problem persists contact Technical Support Error Software Problem The software was unable to complete the calibration due to insufficient Detected movement of the vehicle If the problem persists contact Technical Support Calibrating the proportional steering gain Note Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than satisfactory The proportional steering gain PGain setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics e Slew Time The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa e Overshoot The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter these settings High PGain values Low PGain
237. field and indicate whether it is left or right of the centerline Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as negative numbers The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the roll offset correction Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it Coulter wheel track offset method Flag offset method Choose the method that best matches the conditions Calculating the roll offset Coulter wheel track offset method l a e g N 10 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length Reset the roll offset value to 0 zero Start a new field Create a straight AB Line Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass At the end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass In the middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line This ensures there is no cross track err
238. fields and then tap OK Operating the Tandem Dual plugin Blade height indicators Once you install and configure tandem mode two implements each with a GPS receiver or dual mode a single implement with a GPS receiver at each end a second blade height indicator appears on the Run screen Item Description 1 Primary left side implement height indicator 2 Secondary right side implement height indicator These operate in the same way as the single receiver FieldLevel height indicators See Blade position indicators page 196 Auto buttons With a tandem dual configuration the Autopilot Engage button is replaced with two FieldLevel Auto buttons e With a tandem configuration the P Auto button controls the automatics of the primary front implement and the S Auto n button controls the automatics of the secondary rear Pi Pi implement e With a dual configuration the P Auto button controls the automatics on the primary left side of the implement and the S Auto button controls the automatics on the secondary right side of the implement 220 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Note To control both sides of the implement simultaneously when using a dual configuration you must tap both buttons Note With the addition of an external GPS receiver you can use the Autopilot system with tandem and dual systems An Engage button appears next to the P Auto a
239. g 0 ee ee ee ee 233 Material tabi sie 6 ba te ipea a d ai doh doe wt Bok eee wi agoia a h d eerste 233 Layout tabe to605 8 ee tien ou bo Gees adee Radka bo Pees 235 Section Controlitab ses secu Be Piece egos Pe a a ae CR ee a a ete ae 236 Rate Controltap isa wal piesa Gk se oe PaaS obs hala a wee pea 238 Row Monitoring tab si c8 asa ae eA EEN eae ed ee 241 Sensors taD sane aag aa g Ea dere E a a a eh Meche daha wg wore Galette 242 Operation tab sossa s amie iega eke E a eai ed Poe aE cae Boe eas 243 Material Setup Complete screen 2 2 ee eee 243 Calibrating the implement lift switch 00 0 00200 eee eee 244 Calibrating the Rawson modules 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 244 Calibrating the PWM valves 1 ees 248 Operating in the field s saa sche alate Shae eA Ae ede oe ed a ee es 251 Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding 1 eee ee eee 251 Material tabi a siese neted bieta Ae nh a do Ble ee eve Re 252 Layout tab fc oyu kia aces aah be SW aay PS ek pau ge AO ages 254 S ction Comtroltab sies ov ew ME BER ed ow ee eee we oe was 255 Rate Control tabi s aasar a ieus BiG Beso tied LG vow Ba ww a God woah 257 Row Monitoring tab seb heeded ede ae eo ee eee ee Se eae as 260 DEMSOFS CAD airy morat aa e eden dee GA 6a dys cing Sandal gad de ian fe eae 261 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 11 Contents Operation taD s esa bo Mh ea es gh a ede Pe ee ee ee eG 262 Material Setup Complete scree
240. gage and you will be able to re engage more quickly WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer Trimble strongly recommends that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is unacceptable under all conditions Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough In either case manual override may cease to function correctly On some platforms you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not detect any steering wheel motion It is vital that you avoid this FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 To configure and check the manual override 1 Select the Manual Override option from the procedure list see page 111 Autopilot Manual Override Calibration ie Instructions Move this control to adjust the sensitivity of the manual override feature A higher value makes the manual override less sensitive to steering wheel movement Waming This calibration adjustment should only be made by qualified personnel Misadjustment of this calibration setting could result in the failure of this critical safety feature High Sensitivity Low Sensitivity 18 LEAT Di Fe Pe RS VST PVG S Vee PE VG PW PR 2
241. granular material Seed Count Select this option for precision seeding Setup Row Sensor Enable Turn individual row sensors on or off Row Sensor Wiring Select which wire each row sensor is wired to FmX Integrated Display User Guide 241 10 The Field IQ Plugin Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup Setting Description Add Sensor Add a new sensor Edit Sensor Edit or view the settings for an existing sensor Remove Sensor Delete an existing sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information Setting Description Sensor Type Select from e Air pressure vacuum e Liquid pressure e NH3 pressure e Bin level e RPM e Gate Height Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor 242 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Operation tab Field IQ Setup ow Setting Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the s
242. gt Setting Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field 254 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See
243. h off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Boundary Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled By individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value 288 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 2 3 4 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option Raise the implement and then tap Next Lower the implement and then tap Next Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the Rawson modules for spreading Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or rate control module set up to cont
244. h plugin requires a different configuration For a detailed description of how to configure each one see the appropriate chapter later in this manual In general e Each plugin has several setup screens To access the screens tap the plugin and then tap Setup Calibrate or Diagnostics Configuration e7 e Most of the plugins add additional features to the main guidance screen Entering the password to activate a plugin To activate some plugins you must enter the activation password If you do not have an activation password contact your local Trimble reseller You can activate a plugin through a text file see below or manually see page 172 Option 1 Activating automatically through a text file Note This method of activating the system is faster than the manual method When you purchase the TrueTracker system the FieldLevel II system or a variable rate system your local Trimble reseller provides you with a text file containing a password 1 Insert the USB memory stick from the FmX integrated display into a card reader that is attached to an office computer FmX Integrated Display User Guide 171 8 Overview of Plugins 2 Rename the text file delete the section of the name following the password number For example Password 4850576341 FMX 2DGPSto2GLONASS TXT becomes Password 4850576341 TXT 3 Copy the password text file from the office computer into the AgGPS Firmware folder on the memory stick W
245. hat copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution
246. hat has an existing master benchmark and have selected Force Rebench a large green circle is shown for 100 m 300 ft around the master benchmark flag This indicates that you need to rebench over the master benchmark location to ensure that the design is aligned with the previous position You must be within this circle before you can re establish the master benchmark To ensure that the design is properly aligned 1 Return exactly to the master benchmark location that you marked on the ground for example with flags see Creating a benchmark page 182 regardless of where your current onscreen position appears to be 2 Re establish the benchmark This process accommodates RTK base station setup differences from the last time the field was open Collecting field data After you create the benchmark s collect field layout data On the FieldLevel II tab that appears on the Run screen see page 193 use the drop down menu to select one of the following types of field layout data Item Description Boundary The outside of the field Interior Points on the inside of the boundary Section Can be used to divide the field into smaller sections To record the layout data tap Record To stop recording tap Record again FmX Integrated Display User Guide 183 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins 184 Defining the boundary Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field Drive around the boundar
247. he FmX integrated display O Primary cut fill Primary cut fill indicator When the blade is below grade the up arrow is red indicator thin is close thick is a long way off When the blade is above grade and cut is required the down arrow is red When on grade the center is green See Blade position indicators page 196 5 Secondary cut fill For use with tandem and dual scrapers For dual scrapers it is the right side indicator For tandems it is the rear scraper See Blade position indicators page 196 O Cut fill status panel This scale bar displays the number value assigned to each color You can choose to display either cut fill or height FmX Integrated Display User Guide 195 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Item Description Description 7 Primary Auto This button engages the automatics to the hydraulic valve controlling the blade When using dual scrapers this is the left side of the blade When using tandem scrapers this is the front scraper 8 Secondary Auto This button engages the automatics to the hydraulic valve when using dual or tandem scrapers When using dual scrapers this is the right side of the blade When using tandem scrapers this will control the rear scraper Create Benchmark You must create benchmarks that FieldLevel II operations use as a point of horizontal and vertical reference 10 FieldLevel II dual Used for either a dual or tandem scraper conf
248. he Yield Monitoring Plugin 18 Third party display instructions Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Greenstar Monitor 1l Press SiSaSis 2 Press Harvest Monitor gt for Harvest Monitor 3 Position the header to 100 Record Stop Height 4 Press 50 0 next to Record Stop Height Configuring the Stop Head Height on the Command Center 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Select the Combine icon in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Press the 3rd button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab 0909009 4 After Combine tab is selected continue to press the 3rd button from the left until page 3 appears page numbers are located on the Combine Tab sor 30 idka B Record Stop i 56 5 Position the header to 100 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 409 18 410 The Yield Monitoring Plugin 6 Press Enter on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height Record Stop Height 2 56 Calibrations Original Greenstar Display 60 Series Combines Calibrate Moisture 1l Press Kanz Calculate moisture correction certified tester reading minus the Greenstar reading 2 Select Yield Monitor gt 3 View pagel Bia Yield Mon Kaag 4 Check moisture with a certified tester 5 6 Input the moisture difference Calibrate Yield l Press Kaa 2
249. he bar mount and then tighten the screw 36 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Connecting the display Note The FmX integrated display connects to the Autopilot automated steering system The Autopilot system requires professional installation in your vehicle If the Autopilot system is not currently installed in your vehicle consult your local reseller 1 Connect one end of the Autopilot harness to the vehicle 2 Connect the Autopilot to FmX cable to port C of the FmX integrated display 3 Connect the implement switch if required Inserting a memory stick into the USB socket The USB socket is on the rear of the display AN CAUTION Do not remove the USB memory stick from the socket while the display is writing to or from the device This will corrupt the data AN CAUTION If required only use a USB hub that has an external power option connecting multiple USB devices to the display without this could damage the USB port To insert the USB memory stick 1 Rotate the display so you that can see the back of it 2 Insert the USB memory stick into the USB socket FmX Integrated Display User Guide 37 2 Display Overview To remove the USB memory stick 1 Rotate the display so that you can see the back of it 2 Pull the USB memory stick out of the USB socket The display automatically detects when a memory stick is inserted or removed External lightbar s The FmX integrated display al
250. he blade when moving dirt To measure this value park the implement on a flat surface and raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the ground The Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to avoid the need to re bench between Survey mode and moving dirt 3 Set the survey point density from the Survey Point Density drop down menu When you create a survey of a field this setting determines the distance between the collected survey mapping points The approximate distances between points are Setting Distance Coarse 7 8 m 25 ft Medium 3 m 10 ft Fine 1 5 m 5 ft 4 Set the Cut fill Color Range The Cut fill color range defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the cut fill map The cut fill map appears only after you have surveyed the field and defined a design plane The range is displayed from the highest cut value to the highest fill value Example If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest fill value is 1 foot and you 178 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 set your Cut fill color range to 2 feet then the colors will be spread evenly across your cut fill map If you change the cut fill color range to 1 foot then the colors will become more focused around the neutral area providing more detail closer to the grade 5 Select the Relative Heights tab 6 Selec
251. he boundary area Operate The system will apply outside the boundary area Material Controlled By Rate Snapping Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field JQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen 262 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Calibrating the modules Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The Field IQ Calibrate option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ p
252. he extent that a the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed configured interfaced maintained stored and operated in accordance with Trimble s relevant operator s manual and specifications and b the Products and Software are not modified or misused The preceding warranties shall not apply to and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from i the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software products information data systems interfaces or devices not made supplied or specified by Trimble ii the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than or in addition to Trimble s standard specifications for its products iii the unauthorized installation modification or use of the Product or Software iv damage caused by accident lightning or other electrical discharge fresh or salt water immersion or spray outside of Product specifications or v normal wear and tear on consumable parts e g batteries Trimble does not warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product or hat software components will operate error free THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN THE PRODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED AS S AND WITHOU
253. he version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by th
254. hen you next insert the USB memory stick in the display and turn on the display the plugin is automatically activated Option 2 Activating manually through the display 1 Turn on the display and then tap Unlock in the Home screen Advanced Functionality Access Ge anable Rate amp Note The Advanced Functionality Access screen features a Tips button that when selected provides more information about the unlock features of the FmX integrated display 172 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 2 Tap the icon for the plugin that you want to activate and then tap Unlock 3 Inthe screen that appears enter the activation password that your local Trimble reseller provided and then tap OK Ifyou enter a correct password an Enabled message appears The plugin is now activated Ifyou enter an invalid password an error message appears Enter the password again If it still does not work contact your local Trimble reseller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 173 8 Overview of Plugins 174 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The FieldLevel Il Plugins In this chapter m FieldLevel Survey Design plugin m FieldLevel Il plugin m Tandem Dual plugin The FmX integrated display has three FieldLevel II plugins e FieldLevel Survey Design e FieldLevel II e Tandem Dual This chapter describes the function of each plugin followed by a detailed description of how to conf
255. hes Keyboard ABCDEF i Vehicle Vehicle Not Available SS New Implement Implement 65 7 4 swath width 68 10 77 application width 32 rows Cancel Configure 2 From the Current Configurations screen tap Configure The Configuration screen appears with the currently installed plugins listed on the left of the screen ETa T Autopilot Vehicle 3 Calibrate ay GPS Receiver Diagnostics implement New Implement 3 Save Config 3 Switch Config 4 Add Remove OK FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 169 8 Overview of Plugins Adding or removing a plugin 1 On the Configuration screen tap Add Remove plugin Select Active Plugins 0 Plugi i 2 Ifnecessary enter the Administration password see Password access page 73 In the Select Active Plugins screen you will see the available but not yet installed plugins are in the nactive Plugins list on the left the currently installed plugins are in the Active Plugins list on the right 3 Doone of the following To install a plugin from the Inactive Plugins list tap it and then tap Add gt The plugin moves to the Active Plugins list To remove a currently installed plugin from the Active Plugins list tap it and then tap lt Remove The plugin moves to the Inactive Plugins list 4 Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen 170 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 Configuring a plugin Eac
256. hese will likely generate an error code from a sensor Error Code Description 1 Red gt NIR Red reflectance higher than NIR 2 BOTH lt 01 Both reflectances are below 0 01 3 RED lt 01 Red reflectance below 0 01 4 NIR lt 01 NIR reflectance below 0 01 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 329 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Error Code Description 5 BOTH gt 98 Either reflectance above 0 98 9 NIR lt 015 NIR net reflectance below 0 15 To access the GreenSeeker diagnostics do the following 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure 3 From the Configuration screen select the GreenSeeker plugin and then tap Diagnostics Application information 330 Delivery System and Liquid Control As with any variable rate system the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon the delivery system The RT200 interface module is capable of requesting any rate but the actual rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components Most liquid rate control systems control or throttle the pressure of the system to affect flow and application rate When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system it is important to match nozzle sizes to expected delivery rates After the appropriate reference strip readings GDD and selection of crop type are input into RT Commander the application graph can be acc
257. hich steering movement occurs A N WARNING During the Automated Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle To avoid injury be prepared for sudden vehicle movement In this test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs Notes on calibrating the automated steering dead zone e You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure e To ensure optimal system performance the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console e Ifyou perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures once the system is at operating temperature To configure the automated steering deadzone 1 Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards To minimize the effect of the ground conditions the field should have smooth soil that is loose but firm 2 Select the Automated Steering Deadzone procedure from the calibration list See page 112 Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration 2 Instructions Only proceed if
258. i eos secede ee ete te Aaaa Sn EAT a der we A age de wee Ba a 189 Configuring the FieldLevel plugin 0 0 eee ee eee 189 Step 1 Configuring the implement 1 0 0 0 eee eee ee 190 Step 2 Configuring the leveling model 00 0000 eee eee eee 190 Step 3 Calibrating the FieldLevel II valve module 00040 193 Step 4 Configuring the FieldLevel II GPS receiver 0000s eee 194 Operating the FieldLevel II plugin noona anaua 195 FRU S CTO CTD peas ae we sb i e pand Seat ane ch tose Sad a wad ae AL ap Sate gh Wien stl E a8 a 408 Ia ad gan ck 195 Blade position indicators oases eee 196 FieldLevel II status textitems 1 1 eee 197 Reloading afield os anett eae aha Reb bv ar ewe wie ge do hok a eS 198 Re establishing a benchmark 0 0 0 0 0c eee ee eee 199 Importing control files from the Multiplane software 0 0 0 0 0000 0005 199 Working with MultiPlane designs 0 0 0 ee ee eee 200 Leveling model specific information 0 0 0 0 cece a 201 Driving in Point and Slope mode 1 0 0 cee cee eee 202 Driving in Autoslope mode 6 0 aaea 203 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 10 Contents Driving in Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes 4 208 Defining a plane sor ceccv segue oe Bebe de tava e a Eos wae ee ees 209 Driving in Contour mod ss i064 6 ane ee AG oe a ee eee a 214 Tandem Dual plugin 1 2
259. ide Contents Safety ee ae inea n e a a e a E D a 5 WATTS s doaa ia a ia e fetch Er tan ob dt aiy Ra ia aeaa a Ta E Ae i i ead Aa A 5 1 Introduction i ecer reato remt aneao a 17 About the product 14 sev be tees ae aaie ahi ee ted bee ea a Ge a aE ee ke oad 17 Using thisimanual ss 462s 8d Se es Cae Ee eee eee es 17 Related information say saeia che ace A me ee ee eh ae ee ho 17 T chnical assistante 24 ha ek cata dP SRA ee PE ae eae Shee ae aed 17 OUI COMMITS eso hese ee ak ce ist Sie eh eb a wk Ses ek eb el be Sate el ee ett Wd Bee Satie lta Me 18 2 Display Overview 2 08 08 cee eee eee eee tee eee 19 System components peered ee Kaas oak Ba RRA oe Se ae Mola ea 20 Pack out contents 4 2664 8b 4 ae ao eee aS ee ee E ewe eee Sa 20 HEICOTNL VIC EE T wae ese ca E rs Eo Gee RONAN E gare hie SARs Casas ec ees 21 REA VIEW 4 see ise diastase ARI ot Be oe HA ALC E E Hate Ha ded eiala ge saa 4 22 System SOMWALCs aaiae tana i FA EA EE GS ea de Bee eS 23 Control buttons ss 4 og Maid bad en Radios Ae eee Gora ee es 24 Touch screen elements 4 00644 4 ba Sk RR er ee a eh eo ee 24 Folder hierarchy sises er bad oi Ce Oe aS ad 4 ee ee Raha ee ee OES 27 Using the FmX integrated display 2 2 0 0 ce ee eee 28 Turning on the display 1 2 0 ee eee 28 Turning off the display ss sesa ke ee ed ee A A ee eae 28 HOMES TOO oS FS race e EE Stee ule E oF cp E EA gue hacer 29 Configuration Screen sees ava Gk ha BS ee OS ES eed age eos a od 30
260. iguration control 11 Design button Engage this button to design a field slope and orientation or in the case of Autoslope you can set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile 12 FieldLevel II Used for surveying boundaries interior lines or section lines It is also for Survey design control designing an Autoplane surface where you can create a best fit plane through a surveyed field and balance the cut and fill to your requirements FieldLevel II single Used when there is a single antenna on a scraper or tile plow control Q Blade step Use the up and down arrows to manually adjust the grade of the scraper or tile plow blade 196 Blade position indicators When you use the FmX integrated display to provide guidance for example guiding to a contour guidance is displayed on the virtual lightbar at the top of the screen When you use the display to show field leveling information blade position indicators appear on the Run screen Item Description Example Green bar in center The blade is at the correct target height it is within the On Grade Limit Small red arrow pointing up The blade is beyond the On Grade Limit value below the target height Large red arrow pointing up The blade is considerably below the target height more than double the On Grade Limit value FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Item
261. igure and use the FieldLevel II plugins to create and manipulate field surveys FmX Integrated Display User Guide 175 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins FieldLevel Survey Design plugin 176 Traditionally farmers level their fields for uniform drainage The consistent water flow over the crops improves crop yields and crop consistency which improves profits Description The FieldLevel system is designed in three parts e The FieldLevel Survey Design plugin enables you to use a high accuracy GPS receiver on the leveling implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field The three dimensional data shows the surface topography of the land Note If you are working in a field that has already been leveled you may not need to perform a survey and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system Once you complete the survey you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope that can be graded with minimal dirt movement e After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it you can use the FieldLevel II plugin to control a land leveling implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an optimal slope The FieldLevel II system uses a high accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to measure and control its elevation The FieldLevel II design defines the three dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground The FieldLevel I
262. ime tap Off Note To force the TrueGuide system to turn on when the status is Waiting tap ON again Note As soon as the TrueGuide system is disengaged the Autopilot system immediately begins providing all guidance 340 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueGuide Plugin TrueGuide system status indicators The system status appears on the 7rueGuide tab between the Off On Auto buttons 12 TrueGuide status Description Off The TrueGuide system is off Disengaged The TrueGuide system is ready but not engaged Waiting The Autopilot system is engaged and the TrueGuide system is preparing to engage after a short pause On The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on TrueGuide system aggressiveness settings To set the default aggressiveness value see Setting up the TrueGuide system page 336 Decreasing aggressiveness smooths the response to the implement moving offline Increasing the aggressiveness increases the response to move the implement back to the guidance line For Use as default Steep slopes 10 30 150 Slow speed applications 125 Normal operation 100 High speed applications gt 8 MPH 33 Adjusting aggressiveness during operation 1 From the Run screen select the TrueGuide Plugin 2 Doone of the following To increase aggressiveness tap To decrease aggressiveness tap FmX Integrated Di
263. implement modeling both with and without a GPS receiver on the implement Overlap Values required to apply or avoid overlap Extras Provides access to the Hybrid Setup options and remote log switch configuration Implement Type 1 Inthe Implement Type tab select the current task from the drop down list 2 To change the implement layout tap Edit and then select the layout type that matches your implement 162 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Measurements Implement Configuration 7 Implement Setup 72 a implement Type Measurements Geometry Overlap swncnes Swath Width 40 0 0 A o Application Width 40 0 0 Application Offset 0 0 0 B Rows oe Left Right Offset woo c Note The screen is scaled to the swath or application width whichever is larger If any offset is greater than this the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen Note This setting is used for navigation in the Run screen when you tap Skip to adjust the guidance line the guidance line moves across by this number of rows Enter the following implement measurements Measurement Description Swath Width Set the distance between guidance passes Application The applied width of the tool or boom This measurement sets the width of the Width coverage logging and mapping Application Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where Offset coverage logging will be ma
264. in 10 Flow calibration The Field IQ Calibration option only appears on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ Rate and Section control module installed 1 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Rate and Section Control Module to be calibrated The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration The following screen appears Rate and Section Control Module 5015561943 Valve Calibration Flow Calibration 3 Select the Control tab Allowable Error Gain 4 Enter the following values Allowable Error FmX Integrated Display User Guide 295 10 The Field IQ Plugin Gain Minimum Response Note For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer see the Support Note Field IQ Crop Input Control System For Sprayers and Spreaders 5 Tap OK to return to the main calibration screen and then tap Flow Calibration The following screen appears 6 Enter the following values Gate Height Setting Note If you entered a gate height measurement during setup you must also enter a measurement here Shaft Encoder Constant 296 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 7 To calculate the calibration constant tap Calculate The following dialog appears Gate Width 1 0 0 Drag Chain Distance Per Rev 2 2 0
265. in the Run screen with an AB line configured For more information on opening a field and creating an AB line see Introduction to field features page 40 From the Run screen do the following 1 Tap X Without closing the field the Configuration screen appears Configuration 2 System System Calibrate _ Implement planer Field Open Rly GPS Receiver J Lock Config w 2 Select the TrueGuide plugin and then tap Calibrate 3 Inthe TrueGuide Calibration screen tap Next and then follow the on screen instructions TrueGuide Calibration ie Drive at 7 16 mph Run the test at least four times WARNING When you press the test buttons the tractor will steer sharpty to one side s Speed 0 01 mph Count 0 Offine Dist 102 Tractor Response Tractor is not engaged Please press the engage button Cancel FmX Integrated Display User Guide 337 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 338 4 Complete the test at least four times and then tap OK 5 Inthe Calibration screen tap OK to return to the open field Engaging and disengaging the TrueGuide system To engage the Autopilot and the TrueGuide systems using the FmX integrated display you must have a guidance line defined and the vehicle must be within the engage limits of the system To manually engage the systems do one of the following e Tap the Engage button on the main guidance screen e Press the
266. inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number 4 Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration A CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 5 Tap Test a The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is full the system turns the seed disks one revolution b Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch c Inthe Number of Seed Meter Revolutions enter a value and then tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Trimble recommends 5 to 10 revolutions FmX Integrated Display User Guide 245 10 The Field IQ Plugin d Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system turns the specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue e The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue 6 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set 7 Tap OK 8 Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration Hydraulic test The pu
267. ine field conditions To collect sensor readings for the NRS the boom mounted sensor or handheld sensor should be passed over the crop at 32 48 above the canopy A large area of the NRS and Non Reference portion of the field should be sensed to accurately determine their respective NDVI values Once the NDVI values have been measured they can be entered into the GreenSeeker plugin on the FmX integrated display This can be done automatically with the boom mounted sensors or manually entered if the GreenSeeker hand held is used If the response is variable across the field select an area where the difference between the Reference and the Non Reference areas are most apparent This assures that the algorithm will determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to N for that year In order to estimate yield potential most algorithms utilize an environmental factor Growing Degree Days or Days From Planting which takes into account the weather and length of time that has passed since planting Be aware that different GDD variations are used for different crops and to obtain the GDD value the planting date and sensing date must be known Regional values for GDD may be found on the internet For more information regarding GDD regional values go to http www ntechindustries com software and browse to the Where to Find GDD Information link Field setup To prepare a reference area do the
268. ing system For several years the Autopilot system has been the most accurate system for agricultural guidance by Trimble Now with the FmX integrated display that same accuracy can be controlled with a touch screen interface to provide easy precise and reliable steering With the additions to the software in version 5 11 you can use the FmX integrated display to perform many other functions including implement guidance or field leveling CHAPTER Using this manual The FmX integrated display uses segments of product functionality called plugins to add or remove display options This manual contains a description of all the plugins however it is unlikely that you will use all of the plugins Related information Sources of related information include the following e Release notes The release notes describe new features of the product information not included in the manuals and any changes to the manuals The release notes are available at www trimble com e Trimble training courses Consider a training course to help you use your GPS system to its fullest potential For more information go to the Trimble website at www trimble com training html Technical assistance If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the product documentation contact your local reseller FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 17 1 Introduction Technical Support To contact Trimble Technical Support 1
269. ing this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 249 10 The Field IQ Plugin Flow Calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears 1 Inthe Calibrate tab enter the following Setting Description Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Shaft Encoder Pulses per revolution Constant Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number Test Follow the on screen insttructions to test the settings you entered 250 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 2 Select the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap H 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and
270. inistration Password screen appears Saving the vehicle configuration Note The vehicle configuration is different from the display and implement configuration The vehicle configuration saves the Autopilot vehicle settings that you created The display configuration saves the display appearance features that you selected and the implement configuration saves each implement including plugins and physical attributes 436 L From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup The Vehicle Controller Setup screen appears Edit the vehicle settings and tap OK Tap Save Config To overwrite a previous configuration file tap Switch Config and then select the previous file from the Vehicle Configuration list FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Advanced Configuration 22 4 To save the file tap OK 5 Tap Save Config Before the configuration file is saved the following message appears You are about to overwrite the existing Vehicle Configuration Do you want to Save or create a New Configuration Tap either Save to overwrite or New to create a new configuration file Saving a PDF version of the current field When you close a field the system automatically creates a PDF summary file The PDF is saved to the AgGPS Summaries lt client_farm_field_event gt folder A at Smith_Ranch I S gt Trimble STRIPTILL Event Summary Operator LO Event Created Summary Created LafituderLongitud
271. ion buttons These items are described in more detail below FmX Integrated Display User Guide 45 3 Getting Started 46 Hashed grids Hashed grids provide an immediate measure of distance Each small square represents 10 feet and each dark green outline represents 50 feet Virtual lightbar The virtual lightbar provides vehicle guidance When the vehicle is perfectly on the guidance line the three center green LEDs are lit 099090000000000 OMe 9900000000000 When the vehicle moves off the guidance line to the left or the right the three LEDs that are lit drift to the side 0900000000000 om 9900000000000 To configure the virtual lightbar see Lightbar page 96 Plugin tabs Most of the plugins have features that appear on a tab on the Run screen To select a tab tap the icon in the tab FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 GPS receiver information The button in the top right of the Run screen provides information about GPS 1 2 3 Item Description 1 Satellite Information button 2 Current number of satellites Type and age of correction If the GPS signal is lost completely the No GPS message appears Tap the satellite information button to view the information on it There can be more than one row depending on the plugin that is z poadia pe installed If the plugin requires a second GPS receiver for example
272. is License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things FmX Integrated Display User Guide 3 a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you in
273. is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Notes Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller On the Hardi 6500 you must use the terminal version 1 55 or later and Jobcom version 1 55 or later The Hardi 6500 must be set to metric units Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following 1 Turn on the controller 2 Hold the ESC button while turning on the Hardi contoller 3 In the extended menu use the arrow keys to select the E 4 Data Exchange menu 4 Enter the COM 1 setup and the set the following Equipment type VRA remote Protocol Hardi VRA Baud Rate 9600 5 Turn of the controller and then turn it on 6 Goto Menu 2 3 and select VRA Remote Control Enable Flex Air The FmX integrated display can send rates to the Tyler Flex Air variable rate controller The controller can have four channels main liquid co applicator and supplemental Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging dbf file but the FmX integrated display can send rates to only one channel at a time the active channel The Tyler Flex Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the FmX integrated display Using the Tyler Flex Air controller The Total_Qty field in the variable rate logging dbf file and the Avg_Rate field in the EventHistory dbf file record statistics for the ac
274. is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements e Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field IQ Setup Material Layout Section Control Setting Description Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 231 302 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control mod
275. is in position 1 e Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 e Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Manual Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Manual position the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount each time you press the Rate adjustment increment decrement switch on your master switch box e Minimum Rate This setting is the minimum rate that will be applied e Maximum Rate This setting is the maximum rate that will be applied Units tab Adjust the following Unit settings e Seeds Per Pound Enter the number of seeds per pound of the current material e Target Rate Units Choose what units your target rate will apply e Bushel Weight Enter the bushel weight of the current material FmX Integrated Display User Guide 265 10 The Field IQ Plugin Layout tab Enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Pow Monitor q gt Setting Description Bin Tank Setup Allows the system to track how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the
276. is range for more than three seconds a warning appears VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision VDOP is a measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal If the VDOP reaches this value a warning message appears Trimble recommends a VDOP setting of less than 3 Blade Step Tap the Blade Step field and then enter the amount that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down by the or v offset buttons Course Blade Step Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large increments with a single tap such as a 0 2 fill Select the Coarse Blade Step field and then enter the amount that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down in Coarse mode Antenna Select the Antenna Height field and then enter the height of the antenna above the Height lower edge of the blade On grade Select the On grade Limit field and then enter the limit Limit This sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to thin red arrows At twice this distance the height indicators become thick red arrows See Blade position indicators page 196 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 191 9 192 The FieldLevel II Plugins Item Description Disengage When you disable Auto while scraping a field you can set a time value that will Raise automatically raise the blade For example if you set 0 5s the blade will raise for half a se
277. ist 2 Tap New Pivot The Run screen appears 3 Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot and then tap Set A 4 Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then tap Set B The Enter Distance to Pivot Field Edge screen appears 5 Enter the distance or the number of rows from the current path to the outside of the pivot and then tap OK The pivot appears Adjusting the outer edge radius The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate coverage area Once you create a pivot you can adjust the outer edge radius 1 From the Run screen tap Swaths The Swath Management screen appears 2 Select the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots Note The default is the AB curve 3 Inthe Outer Edge Radius window adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the pivot center to the outer edge and tap OK The Swath Management screen appears 4 To update the pivot tap Load The Run screen appears with the new pivot dimensions The Record button When you create guidance based on the curve or headland pattern the Record button is available The Record button enables you to insert a straight section of line rather than having the line follow the exact path of the vehicle as happens with direct mapping FmX Integrated Display User Guide 55 3 Getting Started 56 When you select tap Record the line you are driving is mapped When you deselect Record the display stops direct
278. l Next gt gt OK 130 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Autopilot Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees Calibration screen This calibration procedure determines the compensation required for dead band in the steering pumps Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration A CAUTION The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure To avoid injury be prepared for vehicle movement The instructions for this calibration test span several pages onscreen Follow the instructions on each page Saving a vehicle profile Note From firmware version 3 0 on the FmX integrated display the Vehicle Profile Location defaults to From Database Once you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle you can save that information for later use This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the display from one vehicle to another 1 From the Home screen tap K 2 Inthe Current Configurations screen tap Configure FmX Integrated Display User Guide 131 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 3 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Engoge Steering Advoncea Connector k int GPS1 oK Current Selection Default Vehicle Vehicle Color EF EA 4 In the Vehicle Controller Settings group tap Edit Vehicle Profile Location from Database new gt Model v Browse
279. l the water table using FieldLevel II drainage features Use RTK GPS technology which has a significantly larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit Work with your existing Agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective system For example you can connect the Autopilot system to the FmxX integrated display at the same time as the FieldLevel implement Manually control the FieldLevel II system with the EZ Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module SIM Requirements of the FieldLevel Il system The FieldLevel II system requires An FmX integrated display with or without the Autopilot system A platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type P N 55045 xx An unlock code for the FmX integrated display field leveling functionality A leveling or drainage implement Installation For installation instructions refer to the FieldLevel II System Installation Instructions that are specific to your vehicle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 177 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Configuration Install the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 To configure the plugin 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel Survey Design plugin and then tap Setup 2 Set the Survey Height Offset This value represents the difference between the height of the blade when surveying and the height of t
280. lade up when Auto is disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be swapping between the two For a dual setup with a single implement Trimble recommends that you have the left and right Disengage Raise values set to the same value Step 6 Calibrating the Tandem Dual valve module When working with a tandem dual configuration the valve module must be calibrated for both the FieldLevel II plugin and the Tandem Dual plugin e The Fieldlevel II plugin valve calibration relates to the front implement cylinder in a tandem configuration or the left side cylinder of a single implement e The Tandem Dual plugin valve calibration relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration or the right side cylinder of a single implement e Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type To calibrate the valve module 1 From the Configuration screen select the Tandem Dual plugin and then tap Calibrate Tandem Dual Calibration 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 Tap Start FmX Integrated Display User Guide 219 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration
281. lap Use this tab to set the Infill Boundary When you map a headland you create an inner boundary and an outer boundary Select Inner to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary Select Outer to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary Switches FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 165 7 Implement Configuration In the Switches tab tap Setup Set the following in the Add Edit Implement Lift Sensor dialog Measurement Description Status Select ON if you have one or more implement switches tied into your implements control system Select OFF if you have no implement switches tied into your implements control system Number of Select the number of implement switches that you have tied into your implement Switches control system Minimum Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to Changed determine if the implement is lifted Switches Deleting an implement To delete an implement that you no longer require 166 1 From the Configuration Selection screen tap Implement Switch 2 From the Implement Configuration screen select the appropriate implement from the list 3 Tap Delete 4 When prompted tap Yes to confirm the deletion FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Overview of Plugins In this chapter This chapter explains the FmX integrated display plugin and how to configure plugins E Intr
282. lay User Guide The GPS Receiver 6 3 From the Connector drop down list select Connector D to enable radar output 4 Select the Radar Frequency Rate field 5 Enter the required rate and then tap OK The GPS Receiver Settings screen appears 6 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 157 6 The GPS Receiver 158 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Implement Configuration In this chapter Introduction Creating an implement Selecting an existing implement Importing an implement from the FieldManager display Adjusting the implement settings Deleting an implement This chapter describes how to configure a vehicle implement For more information see Chapter 22 Advanced Configuration You must configure your implement so that the system can tell e Which type of implement is attached How much area it covers e How far offset it is Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 159 7 Implement Configuration Introduction To obtain an implement do one of the following Create a new implement see below Select an existing implement see page 161 Import an implement that was created for the AgGPS 170 Field Computer see page 161 Once you select an implement adjust its settings Se
283. ld features on screen 1 0 cee ee 63 Pausing SUIdANCC eis wie Seed aie we oe deed ehh ae ol Ao aie a eh Re 64 Adjusting the status text size nnua eee 64 Introduction to coverage logging 1 ee ee 65 LOSPING Vices i ae asin ae See SS Ge we Wa dw Wate ae Se 65 PFESCKIPUOMS 3 ccs tse de Gin Saou Gage OS Gast Saal Gael Gow SE BORG oe Ga ANE Md Gao E 67 Display Sep orere eS HESS KEKE S ERE GEE THEW SES 71 Accessing the system configuration settings 6 ee ee 72 Password ACCESS iis a Ni ee e ole De es RE ee Ae ee eS 73 Conhiguring thedisplay s ke dicen 2 Mn Daman de he Bale Mo ee ook an Sa Rae 73 Data Files tosi Be OG eo Sele BRA east wn EEA Sli ee eae eal 74 Map Settings including night mode 2 2 000 e eee ee eee ee 74 Status ICES vs sie Sb aia ewe WG Gi Ae AP ANE aia Gea Gl GE Gea oar Shah w yp aoae a aay aad 77 Selecting the language units of measure and keyboard layout 88 Default settings 4s cca Cee e sav ad eee ee ew ad ee ee CEE a eS RSE EL 89 Feature MAPPING s ou ate ek Aa a ee ele ee ed ae ed a aa le ae 89 Data DictiOnary sas ee ee ea eR RAGS OR PRD eR Pa 95 Lightbatine ia ia e che Sao eb ed eho ok ake dS ae ed RS a 96 EZ REMOLE joystick oe mr et Ge Pele Ble ea bik a ed ein SS a Ri E 97 Guidance s ega k iat a cea wea ah ee ie ie le Wh ae Na ae ee ce eH a 97 SOUNA a3 nd v5 ee ehh ahs Gee eS OU ee a bea o a ble pa ee 98 CAN Dus Settings Seka t eb abe ee RD parama a E pana
284. less than satisfactory The proportional steering gain PGain setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics e Slew Time The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa e Overshoot The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter these settings High PGain values Low PGain values Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot This This provides rapid responses but can cause the improves the stability but can introduce significant steering to exhibit signs of instability for example delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle a tendency to excessively overshoot to oscillate from side to side 356 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Notes on performing the proportional steering gain calibration e Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Perform this calibration on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Run the
285. lugin and then tap Calibrate 2 From the Field JQ Calibration screen select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate The message Not calibrated appears at the end of the modules that need calibration Note Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator Note Before priming the system the Automatic Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in the manual position Note If you have an impelement lift switch calibrate it first See above Field IQ Calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 263 10 The Field IQ Plugin 3 Select Drive Calibration and then tap OK The Drive Calibration screen appears this screen has four tabs Tab Description Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Auto Tuning Drive Settings AN WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration 4 Operating in the field Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK The Flow Calibration screen appears 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 From the Cur
286. ly mapping your path Instead a dotted line spans from the vehicle to the point where you deselected Record When you select the button again the line becomes solid and your path is mapped again Point where Record was de selected Creating guidance with the FreeForm pattern The FreeForm pattern is an advanced pattern that enables you to create multiple lines of different types in a single field to obtain guidance in fields of any shape You need to record each line that you drive to generate the next guidance line You can create e Curved line segments e Straight line segments in the form of straight AB Lines With this combination you can use the FreeForm pattern to create non circular spirals or multiple curved guidance lines for irregular shaped fields X Tip With FreeForm curves remember that your next guidance line will appear only if you record your vehicle s path along the current guidance line Record each pass to generate your next guidance line Creating a FreeForm section 1 From the Run screen tap Swaths The Swaths Management screen appears 2 Select the FreeForm tab in the upper left of the screen The New FreeForm button becomes available toward the lower right of the screen 3 Ifnecessary select the Record FreeForm when logging button See Recording FreeForm guidance simultaneously with coverage page 58 4 Tap New FreeForm The Run screen reappears with the Define FF Next Path and Pause
287. m downloads A copy of the LGPL license is included in the appendices of this manual and at ftp ftp trimble com pub open_source FmX This software includes the DejaVu fonts which are licensed under the Bitstream Vera license terms available at http dejavu fonts org wiki index php title License and http www gnome org fonts 2 FmX Integrated Display User Guide GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright c 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to u
288. m halfway across the width of the left track to halfway across the width of the right track Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration J Calibrating a hydraulically steered tracked tractor If you selected a hydraulically steered tracked tractor as the make and model Engine Speed appears on the calibration list Notes on hydraulically steered tracked vehicles e This group of vehicles includes the CAT AGCO Challenger Tracked family e Nocalibration is required ifthe system is installed on a CAT MT 700 800 series equipped with the ISO option FmX Integrated Display User Guide 129 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Autopilot Engine Speed Calibration screen The Autopilot Engine Speed Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is correct Instructions Make sure that tractor is in Park and Press the Next button Engine RPM in cot wim x If the Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the sensor output Autopilot Hydraulic Tracked Integral Gain Calibration screen The Autopilot Hydraulic Tracked Integral Gain Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the response of the hydraulic steering pumps Follow the onscreen instructions to perform this procedure Instructions Make certain that the tractor is moving forward slowly Use lowest gear with high engine RPM Press Next Right Pump pr Left Pump i Cance
289. mX integrated display can be opened directly into the Farm Works software You can make changes to the files and save them on an office computer Do not save changes back to the USB memory stick as this could mean that you cannot select the field with the FmX integrated display The Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view the data in the attribute dbf file Generating files in the office The FmX integrated display can load files that you created in office software Save Shapefile or Agfile gdx prescriptions to the AgGPS Prescriptions folder on the card to send rates to a variable rate controller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 443 23 Data Management Folders on the USB memory stick This list shows e The names and types of files containing mapping and logging information e The folder where the FmX integrated display saves these files on the USB memory stick Event history Event information EventHistory dbf Point features Attribute ID and latitude longitude and height PointFeature shp PointFeature dbf PointFeature shx Line features Line with attribute ID LineFeature shp LineFeature dbf LineFeature shx Area features Area polygons with attribute ID AreaFeature shp AreaFeature dbf AreaFeature shx Data Description Files folder Field AB Line Boundary and or AB Swaths shp Field Lines polylines Swaths dbf For mor
290. mark to be used as the primary pivot and then tap Add The benchmark is be copied to the Design Benchmarks list Repeat Step 4 until all the required benchmarks are copied to the Design Benchmarks list The Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi point plane To set the Primary Slope Heading choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the From Set gt button Note Trimble recommends that this point is the uphill point of the two points to be used to define the primary slope Ta Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the To Set gt button FmX Integrated Display User Guide 211 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Ea The selected benchmarks appear in the Benchmarks table along with their associated cut fill values The Primary Slope and Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen 9 To update the slope values Identify the benchmark to be used as the new pivot b Tap the Choose Pivot button The Choose Pivot screen appears c From the Choose Pivot screen select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen d Tap OK The Plane Editor screen appears 212 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 10 Select the Primary Slope Cross Slope or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as required Note The cut fill value
291. minimum flow rate for the system Use this setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level 2 Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions 3 If used select the connector that the pressure sensor is connected to and then enable the sensor 4 Tap Run Calibration and then follow the on screen instructions 5 Tap OK to return to the Configuration screen Operating in the field 1 From the Home screen tap H 2 From the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading Make sure that you have set your implement to Spreading and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab See Material page 278 Layout page 279 Section Control page 280 Sensors page 287 Operation page 288 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 277 10 The Field IQ Plugin Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup 2 we Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Sensors Setting Description Material Type Material Name
292. mph ag Master Switch Off Aagressivenss 100 el PPP ECE PEE PEE The Hardware tab displays the connected Field IQ CAN modules and the following attributes Operations Hardware a an Serial number e Position on the implement Firmware version e Status of CAN connection e Tx Rx number of packets FmX Integrated Display User Guide 313 10 The Field IQ Plugin 314 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The GreenSeeker Plugin In this chapter This chapter describes how to configure and operate the GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate and m Introduction mapping system plugin on the FmX integrated m GreenSeeker primary display components m Care and maintenance m Field preparations for Nitrogen application m Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin m Application information m Best practice FmX Integrated Display User Guide 315 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Introduction The GreenSeeker RT200 Variable Rate Application and Mapping System is a tool for variably applying agricultural chemicals based on real time measurements of the crop The sensors measure normalized difference vegetation index NDVI of the plants while traversing the field The applicator provides the ability to variably apply agricultural chemicals in real time as the applicator passes over the crop The NDVI based variable rate algorithm and parameters may be selected in the field and all
293. n 1 1 2 eee 262 Calibrating the implement lift switch 0 0 00 0002 eee eee ee 263 Calibrating the modules 2 2 2 ee eee 263 Operating in the field os cei ages bp he hes Pk Be RS te G 264 Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying 1 1 ee eee 264 Material tabi p rerea seta kw aad ea ees a gana Dw ee ale ets 265 Layout tab siea oe hs oe eh ee Ba ewe eh ee ge dis ee BE 266 Section Controltab sessi she tavad ded Renda aed ee ewe de alee hd ee 267 Rate Controltab siisi a agen wes bat bea giks bE ee ees a abe ae ies 269 Sensors tabs sasuke A ed SO we Re Bo Si hee le a ee Re Te Beg 272 Operation tab 45 ss aeee ee dy aes Mae Ee ee eee Re eae ye ee 273 Material Setup Complete screen 2 2 ee eee 273 Calibrating the implement lift switch 0 0 0 0 0 00 2c eee eee 274 Calibrating the spraying modules 0 0 eee eee eee 274 Operating in the field sors iie Maas ee ad bale bala ce bees eal head 277 Setting up the Field IQ system for Spreading 1 0 00 0 cece ee eee 277 Material tabi soa a a Gb ici Waa a d A ee ale ical Boh a Ai ataia we Ph ents 278 Layout tabi se ta oe ee eGtige 4 oa Mees OOS EE Rise eat ates 279 S ction Controltab ess seors tereni eine a Se WR aa eS led 280 Rate Coptrolitab xiii moua wit boa ise oak ieee ete on Be ws awa AES ara e wate ates 282 Sensors tad ass wba ede hae A Pe aaa vie ale gata tare a ae GA 287 Operation tab ses se siris agak ag oh es ee SA ea ate
294. n When you open a field enter the additional details When the conditions that you set in the configuration are met they trigger pop up messages on the FmX integrated display 392 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Yield Monitoring Plugin In this chapter Supported Platforms Installation Configuration Calibration Operating the Yield Monitor plugin Third party display instructions The FmX integrated display can access yield monitoring information from John Deere combines and Ag Leader displays This chapter describes how to configure the FmX integrated display for use with various yield monitoring platforms FmX Integrated Display User Guide 393 18 The Yield Monitoring Plugin Supported Platforms The FmX integrated display supports yield monitoring information from the following combines Make Model See page John Deere JD 60 series 395 JD 70 series 395 Ag Leader YM 2000 396 Installation FmX John Deere 9x60 or 9x70 yield monitor This figure shows how to connect the FmX integrated display to the John Deere 9x60 or 9x70 yield monitoring system one oF Be 394 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Item Description Trimble part number o FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX basic power cable 67258 8 m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 50449 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 00S O FmX to
295. n 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup Setting Description Add Sensor Add a new sensor Edit Sensor Edit or view the settings for an existing sensor Remove Sensor Delete an existing sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information Setting Description Sensor Type Select from e Air pressure vacuum e Liquid pressure e NH3 pressure e Bin level e RPM e Gate Height Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify which wire is controlling the sensor FmX Integrated Display User Guide 287 10 The Field IQ Plugin Operation tab Field 1Q Setup Setting Jump Start Speed This setting controls the speed to be used when the Field IQ master switchbox Master switch is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Shutoff Speed This setting controls when to shut the system down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops Speed below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Switc
296. n angle greater than this limit it cannot be engaged 144 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Option Description Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit the system disengages Engage on A B Configure whether the system can be engaged on the master A B line Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages EZ Steer external switch Configure the behavior of a seat foot switch 3 Configure the Engage Options as required and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears Engaging the system To engage the EZ Steer system you must have an open field in the Run screen and have an A B line defined The vehicle must be within the engage limits configured in EZ Steer systems Engage Options To manually engage the EZ Steer system do one of the following e Tap the engage button on the main guidance screen or press the engage button on the optional remote control e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal Disengaging the system Turning the steering wheel manually disengages the EZ Steer system Trimble recommends
297. n the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver In the Display Setup screen select Status Items and then tap Setup r Upper left status text item Upper right status text item Slide out tab status 7 text The Select Status Items screen has two tabs that enable you to configure various display options for the status text items The Run Screen tab The Run Screen tab lets you allocate the various items that will be displayed on the Run screen The status text items appropriate for your current plugins appear in the Info Items list 1 Set the upper left status text item a Inthe Jnfo Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left Set Item button The information appears in the upper left field FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 85 4 Display Setup 2 Set the upper right status text item a Inthe Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right Set Item button The information appears in the upper right field 3 Inthe Timeout list select a time This is how long the tab remains on screen before retracting To have the tab extended until you close it manually select Never 4 To add status items to the slide out tab a Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill For example to add an item to the first position on the list tap at the location shown Select Status Items b Inthe nfo Items list tap the item you want to use c Tap l
298. n then use the buttons to add field features to your map while driving 999090000000000 050 00000000000090 Item Description 1 Mapping tab 2 Feature button set up to represent a river Feature button set up to represent a fence O Feature button set up to represent an exclusion Area feature drawn with the Boundary feature button Note For more information on setting up the Feature buttons see Feature mapping page 89 40 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Starting a field This is the screen where you either re open an existing field or create a new field You must select a Client Farm Field and Event in that order Getting Started 3 Note The first time that you use the Field Selection screen there are no existing fields so you must create one 1 From the Home screen tap dt 2 stip Implement AD Cancel System Language E nglish Units Feet and Inches Keyboard ABCDEF Tractor 2WD MFWD 123 14 0 swath width 14 0 application width 8 rows oma em oma em Oom e From the Configuration Selection screen tap OK Client farm Event Selected implement aa Event Attributes Variety Setup 123 14 0 swath width 14 0 application width 8 rows AD No GPS position OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 41 3 42 Getting Started Sh Os OV 9 Do one of the following Create
299. nd S Auto buttons The FieldLevel II tab dual mode The standard FieldLevel II tab in dual mode has a single set of up and down buttons These buttons control the height of the whole implement Use them to raise or lower both sides of the implement simultaneously For example if the blade is on an angle and you raise it with the up arrow on the standard FieldLevel II plugin the blade remains at the original angle The Tandem Dual tab For both tandem and dual mode the Tandem Dual tab includes a double set of up and down buttons These buttons provide independent control of the implement offset Item Description o Primary front or left side implement height control 2 Secondary rear or right side implement height control e Fora tandem configuration the left up and down buttons offset the height of the primary front implement the right buttons offset the height of the secondary rear implement e For a dual configuration the left buttons offset the height of the primary left side of the implement the right buttons offset the height of the secondary right side of the implement FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 221 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins 222 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The Field 1Q Plugin In this chapter This chapter describes how to calibrate R configure and operate the Field IQ crop input m Introduction control system with
300. nd the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance
301. nd the target height When Cut is displayed the current ground height is above the target height and the height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to moved down to reach the target height When Fill is displayed the current ground height is below the target height P Design Height The originally planned or designed height at the current location P Design Slope When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line P Distance Travelled For use with Point to Slope mode this is the distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled P East The difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP P GPS Status The solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float etc P H Error The current estimate of the error in the horizontal component P HDOP The horizontal dilution of position P Heading The current direction that the vehicle is heading in P Latitude The latitude as recorded by the GPS receiver P Longitude The longitude as recorded by the GPS receiver FmX Integrated Display User Guide 197 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Item Description P Network ID The network ID that the GPS receiver is set to which needs to be the same as the base receiver network ID P North The difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP
302. ne configuration External keypad These steps are described in more detail in the following sections Data Files The Data Files management screen enables you to manipulate your saved data From either the display s internal memory or the USB memory stick you can copy implements prescriptions data dictionaries field data or delete unwanted data For more information see Copying or deleting data files page 457 Map Settings including night mode The Map Settings screen has two tabs that enable you to configure various settings for the FmX integrated display The Main tab The Main tab includes the following options Item Description Map Layout Controls how the information buttons toolbar is displayed on the Run screen the toolbar can be orientated either horizontally or vertically Map orientation Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the vehicle Color scheme Selects either the default or night mode color scheme The night mode color theme uses darker color themes to make the screen easier to see in low light conditions Save summaries On Create a save file for your work Off Do not create a save file for your work FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 To configure the settings in the Main tab do the following 1 In the Display Setup screen select Map Settings X Tip For a new toolbar orientation to take effect restart the FmX int
303. ness settings 2 2 0 cee eee eee eee 341 The TrueTracker Plugin 6s ccc cde we ee ede bese eta dws as 343 About the TrueTracker system 6 ee eee 344 Terminology eee atin ob ae hoe wa Shee a ha GAs Se ee ee 344 Benefits of the TrueTracker system 1 0 0 eee ee eee 345 Requirements of the TrueTracker system 1 0 eee ee 345 Installing the TrueTracker system 6 ee ee 345 Conhisuraion a wees eos ek REGS SKE he eee EE Roa ee ee a aaa i 345 Activating the TrueTracker system 2 2 2 ee ee eee 346 Configuring the implement settings 1 0 2 eee 346 Configuring the Vehicle tab 1 2 eee ee eee 346 Configuring the Engage tab 1 2 ee ee ee 347 Configuring the Steeringtab 2 0 eee ee 348 Configuring the implement controller 0 0 0 000 a 349 Engage buttons 20 6 hee ei dibdct dave ee Pease wee eR ESAS PaO aS 350 Configuring the implement 0 0 0 0 0 ee 351 Calibrating the implements seti cee ee wee Rieti bob a se aie he nla ns 352 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction 0 360 Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 0 0 00 00 eee eee 363 Using the TrueTracker system 2 1 ee ee 364 Main guidance screen 1 ee ee 364 Implement lightbar sss ccs eta whee eR Ed oe See eee EE eas 364 Implement GPS information button 1 0 0 0 ee ee 365 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 13 Contents 14 1
304. nfigure the Field IQ crop input control system to Chapter 10 The Field control sections and vary application rates IQ Plugin GreenSeeker Optional Vary fertilizer rate in real time using crop vigor Chapter 11 The measurements GreenSeeker Plugin Yield monitoring Optional Access yield monitoring information from John Chapter 18 The Yield Deere combines and Ag Leader displays Monitoring Plugin TrueGuide Optional Configure the TrueGuide implement guidance Chapter 12 The system for implement control TrueGuide Plugin TrueTracker Optional Configure the TrueTracker system to enable Chapter 13 The implement steering TrueTracker Plugin Serial Rate Optional Configure a non Trimble variable rate controller Chapter 14 The Serial Controller Rate Control Plugin Remote Output Optional Enable and configure remote data output to an Chapter 15 The external device Remote Output Plugin Serial Data Input Optional Enable and configure data input from an external Chapter 16 The Serial serial device Data Input Plugin Productivity Optional Enable and configure the display to work with an Chapter 17 The monitoring Enalta display to record workflow Productivity Monitoring Plugin 168 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Overview of Plugins 8 Viewing the currently installed plugins To view the active plugins do the following 1 From the Home screen tap A Current Configurations 7 a Display e a Units Feet and Inc
305. ng a plugin page 170 Select the plugin and then tap Setup Manual Guidance Settings T To change the vehicles on screen appearance select a vehicle type from the drop down list Use the virtual keypad to enter measurements into each of the following fields Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna If the antenna is in front of the axle enter a Forward distance If the antenna is behind the axle enter a Back distance Measure the distance accurately within 3 inches An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel Tap OK Note Any changes that you make to the vehicle appearance remain even if you remove the Manual Guidance option and replace it with the Autopilot option 104 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Configuring the GPS receiver When you install the Manual Guidance option the GPS Receiver option is also installed For instructions on configuring the GPS receiver see Chapter 6 The GPS Receiver Run screen for manual guidance When you use the Manual Guidance option the Run screen looks similar to when the Autopilot option is installed except that e There is no Autopilot tab on the right e There is no Engag
306. ngaged during the current session Session Time The length of the current field session Short term XTE A vehicle pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Speed The current vehicle speed Steering Angle The angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense device Survey Area Survey Cut Fill The total area of the current survey The difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Survey Points Swath Length The number of survey points that have been created The length of the current guidance line Note FreeForm curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves Swath Number The swath number L left R right Note FreeForm curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves Swath Points The number of points that define the current line Tank Level The current level of the tank Tank Level N
307. nt s current latitude Impl Long Term XTE An implement Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur more than one hour apart Impl Longitude The implement s current longitude Impl Network ID The RTK network ID of the implement receiver s corrections Impl North The distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the south of the field origin point Impl Nudge Trim The amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement position Impl Offline Dist The distance away from the guidance line Impl Satellites Impl Short term XTE The number of satellites the implement receiver is reading An implement pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Impl Speed The current implement speed Impl Steering Angle Impl Up The steering angle of the implement The vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point a negative number means the implement is lower than the field origin point 80 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Item Description Impl Vehicle Model The implement profile name Implement The name of the current implement Implement F B Offset Implement L R Offset Distance of front to back offset Distance of left to right offset Implement Width Width of the implement
308. ntage less than 10 6 Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew 7 When you locate the best gain value do one of the following Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure FmX Integrated Display User Guide 359 13 The TrueTracker Plugin 360 Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction 1 Select Roll Antenna Compensation from the calibration list Autopilot Roll Antenna Compensation e 2 Before changing these settings complete the procedures described below Notes on configuring the antenna position e Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that the TrueTracker system is completely set up the Autopilot software is properly configured the correct GPS corrections are enabled Read this section carefully before you attempt the configuration Setting the antenna height above the ground 1 Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground field Setting the antenna distance from the center line 1 Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the centerline of the implement to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from centerline
309. ntegrated display This improves your accuracy when you select buttons and gives you faster reaction times FmX Integrated Display User Guide 425 20 The EZ Remote Joystick Requirements e FmX integrated display e EZ Remote joystick Installation For installation information see the EZ Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card Enabling the EZ Remote Joystick 1 Connect the EZ Remote joystick into Port B on the back of the display An EZ Remote joystick icon automatically appears on the Configuration screen 2 From the Configuration screen select EZ Remote and then tap Setup The EZ Remote Assignment screen appears 3 Inthe Z Remote Assignment screen you can configure each key for the function you want to control remotely You can also adjust the brightness of the LED joystick buttons 426 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The EZ Remote Joystick 20 4 On the EZ Remote joystick press the first button you wish to program The Function Assignment screen appears Function Aa a ie 5 Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick 6 Tap Set and then tap OK The Keypad Assignment screen appears again 7 Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 to program more buttons as required 8 When completed tap OK Note You can configure the EZ Remote control joystick while operating in a field From the Run screen tap the Configure button and then follow the steps above Note The functions
310. ntroller In this mode you must vary rates manually on the controller Loss of communication In GPS mode if communication with a Rawson controller is lost the display does not report an error until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate In Non GPS mode the display has no way of knowing when communication with a Rawson controller is lost Special note on using a Rawson Accu Rate controller The display can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu Rate controller for only one drive at a time either Drive A or Drive B To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch do the following e To operate both drives set the drive that is not being controlled by the display to Non GPS mode see above e Connect the FmX integrated display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive To control Drive A connect to COM A To control Drive B connect to COM B e When you use Drive B set the COM port to COM B Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A e Set Bit 7 mode to off Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the FmX integrated display FmX Integrated Display User Guide 373 14 374 The Serial Rate Control Plugin Hardi 5500 and 6500 To use the Hardi 5500 or 6500 you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that
311. o maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping system do the following e Each day or during applicator re fill check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source windows for dust and dirt and wipe clean with a soft rag e The GreenSeeker system should not be left outdoors during extreme weather conditions Wide temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals and may reduce the operating life of the system e DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward Doing so may allow water to collect around the windows and gaskets causing seal failures in those areas Also direct sunlight can in some cases focus enough energy into the sensor to damage the detector Note There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system do not attempt any field repair of a malfunctioning interface module or sensors If you experience operating problems contact your local dealer or Trimble representative Field preparations for Nitrogen application Note The following instructions apply to the most common Nitrogen applications Check algorithms for specific instructions For updated specific algorithm instructions go to www GreenSeeker com Field information Before the GreenSeeker applicator can be utilized to apply nitrogen N across a field a nitrogen rich reference strip NRS or calibration area must be established prior to or shortly after
312. o the Survey Height Offset field Note Trimble recommends that you change the Survey Point Density from Coarse to Fine The FieldLevel II system will then record survey points every 1 5m 5 ft and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface 4 Tap OK 5 Inthe Run screen drive to a point that will be untouched to use as a reference point Measure a master benchmark and then flag this point so you can easily find it again 6 Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch for the most efficient method Trimble recommends that this is the high end of the line Open the Survey Design tab and then select Section from the drop down list f Kil 9999900000059 090900000000 7 Tap Record and then drive the line all the way to the end point for the most efficient method Trimble recommends the end point is where the tile line is to be connected to a main or outlet Tap Record again to stop the recording Note The Record button turn greens when activated and turns grey when deactivated You have now successfully surveyed the line where the tile is to be installed or the ditch is to be cleaned FmX Integrated Display User Guide 205 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Creating the design 1l From the Run screen tap Design in the FieldLevel II tab AutoSlop ai seson econ AT Min Slope Outlet Depth Distance Design Info allows you to check the design parameter
313. oduction to plugins j Note Some configuration settings are unavailable m Adding or removing a plugin when a field is open in the Run screen To access m Configuring a plugin these settings return to the Run screen and then tap m the Home button When prompted to close the field Entering the password to activate a plugin tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 167 8 Overview of Plugins Introduction to plugins The FmX integrated display has a number of plugins that you can install to expand its functionality Most of these plugins require additional hardware to work correctly Item Status Description See Ag3000 modem Optional Enable the Ag3000 GSM GPRS cellular modem to Chapter 19 VRS receive RTK type corrections using VRS infrastructure Plugin for DCM 300 network technology and Ag3000 Modems EZ Remote joystick Optional Control a variety of display functions remotely Chapter 20 The EZ Remote Joystick LB25 external Optional Monitor your line with a second or third lightbar Chapter 21 The LB25 lightbar External Lightbar FleldLevel Optional e Survey a field and then create a design Chapter 9 The Survey Design e Level the field to a design install subsurface FieldLevel II Plugins FieldLevel Il drainage or surface ditches Tandem Dual e Control leveling with two GPS receivers in one of two possible scraper configurations Field IQ Optional Co
314. of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law Ifsuch an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with e
315. of the FmX integrated display using the connection cable P N 67091 and the associated cable for the supported controller Your controller may need a special adaptor cable to work correctly If so contact your local Trimble reseller Most controllers also need to be configured to accept input data from the FmX integrated display For additional instructions see the following section for your controller Note Always make sure that the serial port connector is in place with screws firmly tightened if available FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Enabling the Serial Rate Control plugin For instructions on installing the Serial Rate Control plugin see Entering the password to activate a plugin page 171 Configuring the spray boom in the FmX integrated display Configure the spray boom as described in Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Enabling and configuring the variable rate controller in the FmX integrated display l From the Configuration screen select the Serial Rate Control plugin and then tap Setup Edit Variable Rate Controller settings Q Note The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected 2 3 4 5 6 Select the controller make from the Controller drop down list Select the display port the controller is connected to from the Port drop down list If the Active Channel field appears enter the active channel name In the Send Rate
316. of the implement Trimble recommends that these offsets should be minimized whenever possible 1 Select Roll Antenna Correction from the calibration list see page 111 Autopilot Roll Antenna Compensation G 2 Before changing these settings complete the following procedures Notes on configuring the antenna position e Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that The Autopilot system is completely set up The Autopilot software is properly configured The correct GPS corrections are enabled You read this section carefully e Ifmultiple GPS technologies will be used for example RTK and SBAS use the technology with the highest accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration 1 Setting the antenna height above the ground 1l Place the tractor on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground field FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 2 Setting the antenna distance from the fixed axle 1 Place the tractor on a flat level surface 2 Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna 3 Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle field Enter a negative value if the GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction 3 Configuring th
317. ogistics Meerheide 45 5521 DZ Eersel NL Safety Warnings A gt gt gt gt gt gt Always follow the instructions that accompany a Warning or Caution The information they provide is intended to minimize the risk of personal injury and or damage to property In particular observe safety instructions that are presented in the following format WARNING This alert warns of a potential hazard which if not avoided can cause severe injury CAUTION This alert warns of a hazard or unsafe practice which if not avoided can cause injury or damage Note An absence of specific alerts does not mean that there are no safety risks involved WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting should only be made by an experienced user WARNING During the Deadzone calibration the system moves the vehicle s steering wheels To avoid injury be prepared for sudden vehicle movement WARNING When you tap the liquid flow calibration Start button the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When you tap the control valve calibration Start button the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safet
318. ogram using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a
319. ons protocol which was introduced in 1996 If your controller is not GPS ready or does not use the latest protocol contact Raven for an upgrade pack To use a Raven controller you need a special adaptor cable Trimble P N 69729 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 which is connected to port A or B on the display Configuring the controller For a Raven controller to operate correctly with an FmX integrated display the following Data Menu settings are required e BAUD 9600 e GPS Inac e DLOG ON e TRIG 1 e UNIT Sec Some Raven controllers may forget settings if power is disconnected You must then reconfigure the controller Application width When the FmX integrated display is connected to a Raven controller the total boom section width must be set to match the Application Width setting in the Implement Boom Setup screen AN CAUTION The first boom section width set on the Raven controller must be greater than 0 If you set it to 0 the display will not communicate with the controller FmX Integrated Display User Guide 371 14 372 The Serial Rate Control Plugin The FmX integrated display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to the number of boom sections but it does not know the absolute width of each boom section it only knows the relative width of each boom section with respect to the total boom section width When recording coverage polygons each section is considered to be
320. or Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and return paths Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 12 on page 363 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right ITs Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use Table 12 on page 363 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run opt ttl it tt HA eet FmX Integrated Display User Guide 361 13 362 The TrueTracker Plugin Calculating the roll offset flag offset method L 10 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 zero on the Roll Correction screen See Configuring the roll offset correction page 361 Start a new field Create a straight AB Line Start a new pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to
321. osition The sections and rate are ready to be commanded by the FmX integrated display e 5c Off position Sections are closed and rate is set to zero Note When you use Lock in Last Postion the valve is locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary master valve or section x Tip Use the jump start function if you lose a GPS signal or you want to start applying before your implement is up to speed 226 Note All systems must have a Field IQ master switch box FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Field IQ 12 section switch box optional Only one section switch box can be used on each system Each section switch is automatically assigned to the corresponding section The sections are read from left to right For example switch 1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the implement For more information see the Hardware tab in Setup screen of the Field IQ plugin The section switches have different functions depending upon the status of the master Automatic Manual section control switch on the master switch box When the Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Automatic position e Ifthe section switch is in the on up position the section s assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FmX integrated display e Ifthe section switch is in the off down position the section s assigned to it are commanded to be off When the
322. ot cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Responsible Party Trimble Navigation 935 Stewart Drive Sunnyvale CA 94085 Telephone 1 408 481 8000 Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS GEN RSS 310 RSS 210 and RSS 119 Cet appareil est conforme a la norme CNR GEN CNR 310 CNR 210 et CNR 119 du Canada Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Attention This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications Authority ACA EMC framework thus satisfying the requirements for C Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand Notice to Our European Union Customers For product recycling instructions and more information please go to www trimble com ev shtml Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment products that run on electrical power Call 31 497 53 24 30 and ask for the WEEE Associate Or mail a request for recycling instructions to Trimble Europe BV c o Menlo Worldwide L
323. ot controller Two separate lists show e Any faults that are currently active e A history of faults that have occurred View Warning screen When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens the View Warning button flashes red if there is an active warning on the display To view any active warnings tap the button FmX Integrated Display User Guide 471 24 Troubleshooting GPS Status screen The GPS Status screen provides information on the current GPS data from the GPS receiver Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data e From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot GPS Receiver option and then tap Diagnostics This screen shows Your current GPS position The number of satellites GPS quality The Autopilot system and receiver version numbers Screen snaps 472 To save images in the FmX integrated display tap the button on the right of the screen that matches the current screen For example to create a screen snap of the Run screen 1 Tap Run The Run screen appears 2 Tap Run again The screen snap is saved in the AgGPS Diagnostics Screenshots folder A warning sound indicates that you have created a screen snap Note The screen snap is of the lowest level folder under each button So if you take a screen snap while in the Implement Setup screen the snap is of the Configuration screen The screen snap feature is most useful for capturing images
324. other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in nonfree programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that pr
325. other features of the variable rate controller Coverage mapping The FmX integrated display receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active boom sections from a variable rate controller It does not receive any information about the swath or application width To accurately record coverage maps if your controller does not send the number of active boom sections make sure that you set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using for example the width of the spray boom Target and applied rates The FmX integrated display can control only a single channel at any one time This active channel is specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen The target and applied rates shown on the Run screen are specific to this active channel Units Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement Each channel can be configured to use different types of units for example lb ac oz ac or gal ac When constructing prescription maps make sure that the maps use the same units that the controller is configured for Alarms If you want low limit and target rate alarms set these on the variable rate controller You can also set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription For more information refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller FmxX Integrated Display User
326. ou drive the vehicle along a line and back using the Remote Output plugin to mark points on the ground If the remote output is correctly calibrated the points that you generate when driving in both directions will be close together This section describes some implement calibration steps See also Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Do the following 1 Set the front back offset See page 383 2 Calibrate the front back offset See page 383 3 Set the lead time See page 383 382 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Remote Output Plugin 15 Setting the front back offset A CAUTION You must configure the correct front back offset If you are using an Autopilot system set the front back offset to the distance from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement If you are using manual guidance set the front back offset to the distance from the antenna center point to the implement 2 Accurately measure whichever of the following options is appropriate Autopilot systems The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground Manual guidance systems The distance between the antenna center point and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground From the Configuration screen tap Implement Setup and then enter this value as the F B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen Calibrating
327. oved and where it needs to be added Areas that require dirt to be cut are shaded red FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Areas that require dirt to be filled are shaded blue Neutral areas that do not need adjusting are shaded green Creating a design To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to be moved 1 Enter the Cut Fill Ratio 2 In the Section list do one of the following Select the section to level Select None to level the whole field 3 Tap Best Fit The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the field The design information appears in the design slope options and the Stats table An arrow appears on the image of the field to show the direction of fall If necessary you can manually adjust the angle of the slope However this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum Saving the new design Tap OK to close the AutoPlane screen The new design is saved as the default plane for this field When the field is opened the design loads but the color theme is not saved To re establish the color theme tap AutoPlane and then select Height or Cut Fill FmX Integrated Display User Guide 187 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Reloading a field When you create a design for a field for example a target leveling plane th
328. p Setup Time 2 Ifthe time is not correct tap the or button to change the time by 1 hour increments Signal input module for an OEM switch interface The signal input module SIM can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on screen buttons and features ASIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons To assign the buttons highlight the action in the right column and then tap lt Set to set the action to the specified input FmX Integrated Display User Guide 101 4 Display Setup 102 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Vehicle Guidance Options In this chapter m Manual guidance m Autopilot automated steering system guidance m EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance You must configure the vehicle guidance settings before using the FmX integrated display Vehicle guidance is controlled by either the manual guidance option the Autopilot automated steering system option the FieldLevel II plugins or the EZ Steer system plugin Several of these guidance options incorporate GPS receivers For more information see Chapter 6 The GPS Receiver FmX Integrated Display User Guide 103 5 Vehicle Guidance Options Manual guidance Manual guidance setup options enable you to configure the onscreen vehicle appearance and color 1 2 6 From the Home screen tap X Make sure the Manual Guidance plugin is installed For more information see Adding or removi
329. page 138 2 Calibrate T2 roll compensation See page 139 3 Calibrate the EZ Steer system See page 141 Angle per Turn Aggressiveness Freeplay offset 4 Confirm the calibration settings Note You may have to perform the EZ Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results FmX Integrated Display User Guide 137 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 138 Entering vehicle settings 1 Install the EZ Steer system plugin for more information see the FmX integrated display Plug ins guide 2 From the Configuration screen select the EZ Steer plugin and then tap Setup The EZ Steer Settings screen appears 3 From the Vehicle Type drop down list select the vehicle type 4 Inthe Axle To Antenna Offset field enter the horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna Ifthe antenna is in front of the axle enter a Forward distance Ifthe antenna is behind the axle enter a Back distance Note Trimble recommends that you measure the offset distance as accurately as possible within 3 an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance 5 Inthe Antenna Height field enter the height of the antenna measured from the ground to the base of the antenna 6 Inthe Wheelbase field enter the wheelbase measurement horizontal distance between the front and rear axles Note The Engage Steering and Advanced tabs on this screen are populated automatically with starting values based on the vehicle typ
330. parate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from t
331. planting This reference strip is used to determine the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment mineralization etc and importantly this year s expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen The ideal NRS would run the length of the field but it should at least be 400 feet long Establishing a calibration reference area Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field i e not in high spot or low spot The rate of N necessary to establish a NRS is crop and region dependent and should be equivalent to the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season The rest of the field is referred to as the Non Reference Non Ref portion It may also be referred to as the N limited area or farmer practice region For best results the RT200 should be used to read the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent upon the crop algorithm used For most supplied algorithms this is typically e Wheat Feekes growth stage 4 6 e Corn V8 V12 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 319 11 320 The GreenSeeker Plugin For updated specific algorithm instructions see www GreenSeeker com In order for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing or sidedressing plant coverage should be at least 50 The RT200 system with RT Commander can use the sensor mounted booms to read the NRS or the GreenSeeker Hand Held sensor can be used to determ
332. pped The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type e Rear axle on front steering tractor and self propelled sprayer e Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor e Center of tracks on a tracked tractor Rows Number of rows that are covered by the implement Left Right Offset Measured from the center of the vehicle to the center of the implement or header This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line FmX Integrated Display User Guide 163 7 Implement Configuration Geometry implement Type Measurements Geometry Overlap Switches Type oranvar Hitch to Ground Contact Point 1410 07 Use the settings on the Geometry tab to set up the measurements required for accurate implement modeling Measurement Description Type Select the implement type The antenna offsets are required when a GPS antenna is mounted on the implement for TrueGuide or accurate modeling Hitch to Ground Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the Contact Point implement rotates about For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools Note For modeled implements shortening this setting causes the implement to come online more quickly while lengthening the setting causes the implement to come online more slowly 164 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Implement Configuration 7 Over
333. pplication rate Valve Behavior On Sections Closed Close When all sections ar off the control valve returns to the closed position Lock in Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster Auxiliary Valve Master Valve closes when the system is turned off Dump Valve opens to dump flow to return line when the system is turned off Pump Disarming Switch Enable Select this option if you have a pump disarming switch installed Disable Select this option if you do not have a pump disarming switch installed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 239 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate 240 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Row Monitoring tab Field IQ Setup Setting Description Row Monitoring Disabled Row monitoring is turned off Blockage Select this option when using an air seeder or when applying
334. profile as a blue line Min Slope The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design slope to be any less than the minimum slope 206 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Constraint Description Outlet to The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet Optimal Depth to the Optimal Depth The tile plow will level out over a longer distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run Outlet Depth The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet The Outlet Depth can either be entered or measured To measure the Outlet Depth you can drop the tile plow into the ground so that the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet Tap Measure the outlet Depth is entered automatically When you do this another point is added onto the section line providing that you are within 20m 65 ft of the end of the surveyed section line The height of the outlet is displayed on the profile in a yellow tag Note For ditching applications the Min Depth and Optimal Depth are set close to the surface 5 Tap OK 6 Inthe Run screen you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of the profile The section line that you install to appears as red on the screen where other section lines are white The virtual lightbar at the top of the FmX integrated
335. r select the plugin for that receiver in the plugin list Enabling radar output The FmX integrated display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar pulses are available from port C or port D of the display AN CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harness will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble part number 1 FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 O Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 e 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 155 6 The GPS Receiver 156 Item Description Trimble part number 7 NavController II 55563 00 8 8m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 50449 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 00S 10 Main NavController II cable 54601 oO FmX universal radar adaptor 68461 12 Radar speed output cable 64274 Configuring radar output 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS receiver for any plugin using an internal GPS receiver and then tap Setup EZ Steer GPS Receiver Settings Q 2 Select the Radar Output tab FmxX Integrated Disp
336. r and nozzles used to achieve these results FmX Integrated Display User Guide 321 11 The GreenSeeker Plugin Example of field calibration The photo shows a grower using a GreenSeeker hand held to measure the NDVI of a crop the grower knew the approximate desired rate for Note The NDVI can also be measured using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the GreenSeeker Run screen or using the calibration function Operating the GreenSeeker Plugin 322 The GreenSeeker system requires the one of the following applications to be active on the FmX integrated display e The Field IQ system e Serial Rate Control system Calibrate the GreenSeeker system through the Run screen on the FmX integrated display Before calibration you must collect or input reference strip data to the FmX integrated display Do this with either the boom mounted sensors on the RT200 or with the GreenSeeker hand held sensor prior to application If you use the RT200 interface module for variable rate control you must set up the application equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands Preparing the GreenSeeker plugin To configure variable rate application on the FmX integrated display do the following 1 Power up the RT200 interface module and the rate controller if required The RT200 interface module s green Power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps when the unit is first turned
337. r down to see if the display shows a change for header height State 4 FmX integrated display has lost 1 Check cabling communication from the CAN bus 2 Recycle Power shut down the display and the combine and wait 20 seconds before powering the FmX and the combine back up 3 Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the CAN bus disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display Other reasons why yield monitoring may not work Reason Cause Resolution FmX is not mapping 1 Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere s setting 2 Ensure that the crop type is the same Note The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode FmX stops mapping periodically through the field The header could be raising and lowering past the Stop Logging Header Height setting Increase the Header Height setting on the FmX FmX yield information does not match John Deere s information Different crop types may be selected Verify the crop types match in both displays Major jump or extremely different weight values than shown on the John Deere monitor The Stop Head Height setting is lower than what the John Deere monitor shows The John Deere monitor could be logging more data than the FmX logs therefore showing a larger value Set the Head Height to 100 on the John Deere display 408 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide T
338. rate changes are then made on the go so there are no lengthy delays between evaluating the crop and application When applying fertilizer or other material the NDVI the target rate and the applied rate are logged Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the FmX do not respond with an As Applied value The RT200 GreenSeeker sensors emits light at two specific wavelengths and measures the reflected light The microprocessor in the sensor analyzes the reflected light and calculates the resulting Index value The data from each sensor is collected by the Interface Module which is processed and then transmitted to the FmX integrated display in the cab The FmX integrated display displays the NDVI in real time and sends the appropriate rates to the applicator s rate controller The rate controller may be an internal plug in to the FmX integrated display such as the Field IQ system Alternatively the application rates may also be sent via the Serial Rate Control option as a system plugin Definitions The following terms occur throughout this chapter and on the GreenSeeker plugin software Becoming familiar with the terms will make using the GreenSeeker plugin much easier Term Definition GDD Growing Degree Days A measurement of heat units since planting above a prescribed base temperature N Nitrogen fertilizer NVDI_ Normalized Difference Vegetation Index Commonly used to measure pl
339. rated display Press the Power button on the rear of the display to turn on the FmX integrated display and then wait for the Home screen to appear Tap Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Select the appropriate plugin from the Firmware list Any available firmware upgrade files appear in the upper right list Select the appropriate firmware file Once the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts The component s firmware is updated FmX Integrated Display User Guide 439 22 Advanced Configuration Unlocking additional devices You can purchase enhanced features for the FmX integrated display from your local Trimble reseller To enable the additional features do the following 1 Turn on the FmX integrated display The Home screen appears 2 Tap Unlocks 3 Tap the button for the feature that you want to unlock The Enter Password to Activate screen appears 4 Enter the password and then tap OK The feature is enabled The password is saved to the card for future use 440 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Data Management In this chapter This chapter describes the files and folders on the FmX integrated display USB memory stick m Transferring data to an office computer Data formats Folders on the USB memory stick Files on the USB memory stick Importing AB Lines or boundaries Data dictionaries FmX Integrated Display User Guide 441 23 Data Management Transferring data to
340. re very advanced use them only under the direct advice of Trimble Technical Support The FmX integrated display features advanced power management features to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre set period of inactivity 1 From the Display Setup screen select CAN Bus Settings and then tap Setup 2 Ifthe either the A or B CAN buses do not have a physical terminator enable the CAN Termination option for that bus 3 To control the strength of the edges on the CAN bus enable the CAN Driver Strength setting Trimble recommends that you set the CAN driver Strength to Full FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 99 4 Display Setup Power management The FmX integrated display features advanced power management features to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre set period of inactivity 1 From the Display Setup screen select Power Management and then tap Setup 2 From the Turn Off Backlight drop down list select the required period of inactivity until the backlight dims 3 From the Turn Off System drop down list select the required period of inactivity until the display shuts down 4 Tap OK 100 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Time zone Note Configuring the time zone can cause multiple warning messages to appear Do not be concerned by this To synchronize the system time to the GPS signals 1 From the Display Setup screen select Timezone and then tap Setu
341. reinitialized message appears 5 Tap OK After the Trained and qualified warnings have appeared the file is loaded Engage button When implement steering is enabled the Run screen Engage button changes state It has two status indicators e The main button color which represents vehicle steering e The small inner color which represents implement steering Implement steering Vehicle steering Is engaged Is engaged 350 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 Configuring the Engage button You can set the Engage button to work in two different ways In the Two stage engage list select the appropriate option Implement Setup Item Description On The Engage button requires multiple taps to engage e The first tap engages implement steering e The second tap engages the vehicle steering e The third tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering Off The Engage button engages with one tap e The first tap engages implement and vehicle steering e The second tap disengages both implement and vehicle steering Configuring the implement Configure an implement so that the system can tell e which type of implement is attached e how much area it covers e how far it is offset See Chapter 7 Implement Configuration Note When you enter the number of implement sections if the implement does not have sections enter 1 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 351
342. rent Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Spraying Make sure that you have set your implement to Sprayer and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab See Material page 265 Layout page 266 Section Control page 267 Rate Control page 269 Sensors page 272 Operation page 273 264 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup 2 we Material Layout Section Control Rate Control Sensors Material Type Material Name rosso Setting Description Material Type Material Name Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting e Row Crop Seed e Liquid e Granular Seed e Granular Fertilizer e Anhydrous Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Application Rate Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch
343. return along the same pass from the opposite direction Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 12 on page 363 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right 11 Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use the table shown below step 12 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 12 Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Use the following table to record the roll correction results Test run Offset distance Offset direction 1 2 3 Total Total 3 Average offset value Entering the roll offset 1 Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset field See Configuring the antenna position and roll offset correction
344. ring e Item Section Description o Steering command override Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels With this feature you can force a certain angle of turn and make sure that the system responds as expected 2 Steering angle Shows the required and actual steering angles The required angle is that which the system is trying to attain and the actual is where the system calculates the wheels are pointing PWM status Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electro hydraulic valve This is an indication of whether the system is attempting to turn left or right 4 Engage button Engages Disengages the system and shows current engage status FmX Integrated Display User Guide 469 24 Troubleshooting Vehicle Diagnostics Details screen Vehicle Controller Setup Details 2 Item Name Description o Diagnostics Vehicle and configuration specific diagnostics up to 9 diagnostics can be shown 2 Accelerometers The raw voltage and scaled G force for each of the system s accelerometers Vehicle voltage The input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle s electrical system 4 Gyroscopes The raw voltage and scaled degrees per second of each of the system s gyroscopes 470 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 Autopilot Faults screen The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopil
345. ring the antenna position and roll offset correction 0 124 Calibrating the line acquisition aggressiveness 0 0 00 000s eee ee 128 Calibrating a tracked tractor 2 ee eee 129 Saving a vehicle profile 2 0 eee 131 Configuring the GPS receiver pt ees ei ee ee ee ees 133 Adjusting the Aggressiveness setting 2 ee ee ee 133 Display only mod cu neaei aaa a a he Gs ow Sake ce ae ae ee aS 133 Connecting the FmX integrated display for display onlymode 134 EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance 2 eee ee eee 136 Installing the EZ Steer controller 2 2 0 ee ee 136 Connecting the EZ Steer system 2 ee eee 136 Calibrating and configuring the EZ Steer system 0 0 0 000000 e eee 137 Operating the EZ Steer system with the FmX integrated display 144 Engage OPtlONs sie gaet on Hees aga tarts Ra oha RN dete ea oD al cate Gee Ba aS a a 144 Engaging the systems sw sf csi i a cae ee weil el Goal Gre wea ad ae elo at 145 Disengaging the system 6 ee eee 145 EZ St er plug scree oi seed ede eee RG Seed we eee ee e a eee 146 Vehicle specific performance 0 0 0 eee eee 146 After using the EZ Steer system 1 ee eee 147 The GPS ReChivel coconect pease so ee oSs 64 5 CEN HR oe ees 149 Configuring the GPS receiver siewi s ioraa ee ees 150 Entering 450 MHz frequencies 1 0 ce ee eee 151 Fnabling S ecureRTK sic dee i a
346. ring the implement page 351 Otherwise configure the implement controller as described here Note When you configure the implement make and model the previous calibration settings are lost If you will want to use the current vehicle settings again save them before you proceed Configuring the implement make and model Note In version 3 0 of the FmX integrated display the Vehicle Profile Location defaults to From Database new 1 In the Implement Controller Settings group tap Edit 2 Doone of the following e To select anew make and model from a database of vehicles vdb on the FmX integrated display CompactFlash card a Inthe Vehicle Profile Location list select From Database new b Tap Browse c Select the required vdb file and then tap Open If you need to obtain a vdb file contact your local reseller e To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file cfg on the card FmX Integrated Display User Guide 349 13 The TrueTracker Plugin a Inthe Vehicle Profile Location list select From Saved File existing b Tap Browse c Select the required file and then tap Open 3 Tap Change Restore Implement The following message appears The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset Do you want to continue 4 Tap OK to load the new configuration or tap Cancel to abort The Autopilot Controller will now be
347. ription Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base station port number Mount Point Base station mount point User Name Assigned username Password Assigned password 7 Tap OK The Configuration screen appears The DCM 300 modem is now configured Note SIM Card Setup tab In the USA the DCM 300 modem comes with an AT amp T SIM card if you subscribe to the Trimble AT amp T or Verizon data plans yoyou do not need to enter the details Ifyou supply your own SIM card you must obtain details of the SIM card from the card provider and then enter them here The SIM card setup is only used for the DCM 300G modem the DCM 300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab FmxX Integrated Display User Guide VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems 19 Ag3000 modem Introduction to the Ag3000 modem The Ag3000 modem enables the FmX integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a Trimble VRS network a third party RTK provider or a Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS Connecting the Ag3000 modem The following figure shows how to connect the FmX integrated display to the Autopilot Automated Steering System while using corrections from the Ag3000 modem A CAUTION Connecting the Port Replicator on the FmX to NavController II cable to the P4 or P12 connector of the NavController II harne
348. rol the rate L 2 From the Configuration screen select the Field IQ plugin and then tap Calibrate From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the module you want to calibrate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above 3 Field IQ Calibration Select the first module to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen appears FmX Integrated Display User Guide 289 10 The Field IQ Plugin Note Ifa Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically Setting Description Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the applicaiton rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number 4 Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration A CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 5 Tap Test a The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is
349. roximity Be within 1 km of the field If you load a shapefile prescription select the rate column If you use complex contoured prescriptions loading the prescriptions can take some time The FmX integrated display shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen the Run screen to show the target rate specified in the prescription file and the applied rates returned from the controller for the active channel FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 67 3 Getting Started When a field is open a prescription is loaded and a controller is connected the target rates read from the prescription and applied rates received from the controller can be shown in the status text items An example with as applied rates displayed is shown below 9999000099990 018RI9 9909090000000909 For more information see Status items page 77 To load a prescription file 1 Map anew field or select an existing field The FmX integrated display searches the card for prescription files within the specified limits If there are many prescriptions on the card this can take several seconds and a progress bar appears 68 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 2 If any prescription files are within the specified limits the Select Prescription screen appears Select Prescri tion 3 From the Available Prescriptions list select a
350. rpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test A CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 2 Tap Next 3 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 Trimble also recommends that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 4 Tap Start 246 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 5 The next screen provides the status of each motor No Error The test was successful Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor 6 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 247 10 The Field IQ Plugin Calibrating the PWM valves Drive Calibration From the Field JQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration The Field IQ Drive Calibration screen has four tabs Tab Description Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Field IQ Drive Calibration 248 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Tab Description Auto Tuning A WARNING Moving parts dur
351. rtual lightbar or an LB25 external lightbar to guide the vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same elevation This can be used for levee marking and applications that require guidance to elevations See Configuring settings for all leveling models page 191 The FieldLevel II plugin Setup screen has five tabs Settings Blade Settings Relative Heights Valve Setup and Height filter The Settings tab is the same for all leveling models except for Point and Slope which includes an extra field for Slope Adjust The other four tabs are the same regardless of which leveling model you choose and are described in the following sections Slope adjust for Point and Slope leveling When you select Point and Slope leveling the Slope Adjust setting appears in the first settings tab of the FieldLevel II Setup screen Item Slope Adjust Description The Slope Adjust field controls the amount that the gradient changes each time you tap the up arrow gt or the down arrow 9 on the Level tab For example if the leveling gradient is set to 3 and the Slope Adjust field is set to 2 when you tap the down arrow 9 on the Level tab the leveling gradient increases to 5 Configuring settings for all leveling models Item Description Allowable Select the Allowable Cut Fill Range field and then enter the acceptable warning Cut Fill Range distance When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside th
352. s The most common way to interact with the display is to use the virtual buttons Treat a virtual button as you would a normal button To press the button tap the area of the screen where it appears Fence i Fence FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Overview 2 Some FmX integrated display buttons have a direct action while others change to show that a feature is enabled or disabled This button is currently selected Virtual keyboard Use the virtual keyboard to enter text and numbers To Tap enter a letter or number the appropriate button enter caps mode the CAPS button leave caps mode the CAPS button again erase a letter that you have typed by mistake the lt lt backspace button clear all the text you have entered the CLEAR button finish entering text the OK button FmX Integrated Display User Guide 25 2 26 Display Overview Virtual number pad The virtual number pad works in the same way as the virtual keyboard Select the Metric Feet_Inches or Decimal Feet button to change the units Tip When you change units the number value in the window is automatically converted to the new unit so select the correct units before you enter a number value Drop down boxes A drop down box if provided lists the options you can select from the current list To select an item 1 Tap the list once to open the drop
353. s enclosed in headlands FmX Integrated Display User Guide 51 3 Getting Started To select a swath pattern 1 On the Run screen select the Mapping tab 2 Tap Swaths Item Description 1 Guidance patterns 2 Line management buttons Existing guidance lines 4 Guidance type buttons 3 Select the appropriate pattern from the drop down list on the right of the screen 52 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Creating a new line The type of line that you can create depends on the swath pattern that you selected Creating a straight line There are two ways to create a straight line AB Line Define the start and end points A Line Define a point on the line and the heading direction To create a straight AB Line 1 2 3 4 5 7 From the Swath Management screen select the straight line field pattern Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 Tap New Straight The Run screen appears To create the start point of the line tap Set A Drive to the end of the line The end B point must be at least 50 meters 160 feet from the A point Tap Set B The new AB Line appears on screen To extend the line drive further along it and then tap Set B again Tap Done To create a straight A line by selecting one point and the angle L 2 Na oO S From the Swath Management screen
354. s at any point along the design Enter the distance in the Distance field or select it by tapping on the screen The Design Info tab will then show the depth elevation and slope information for that point 2 From the Section drop down list select the section line that you want to design Note The section lines are labeled from S1 in the order that they surveyed in 3 The design screen works from the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the wrong way around change the setting in the Direction drop down list from Outlet at Survey Start to Outlet at Survey End or from Outlet as Survey End to Outlet at Survey Start 4 Edit the constraint fields to your requirements Constraint Description Min Depth The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth The minimum depth is shown on the profile as a red line Optimal Depth The depth to install the tile or ditch The design will keep to this depth where it can It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it needs to Max Depth The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth The maximum depth is shown on the
355. s for the boundary features Attribute Description Name a custom name that appears on the Feature Mapping tab Color sets the color of the boundary outline and also the infill color if selected Draw as set to either Productive or Non productive Trigger Warning sets a visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the boundary edge Remote Output when enabled this feature restricts remote output pulses from being triggered while outside the boundary Expand By See the following image Sets how the boundary is actually recorded e Nothing Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded position e Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by the swath width after the boundary is closed e 1 Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by 1 additional swath width after the boundary is closed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 93 4 Display Setup Tap OK The Select Feature screen appears 5 6 Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen appears 7 Tap OK The Display Setup screen appears 8 Tap OK Recording a line feature with coverage logging With the FmX integrated display you can record a line feature simultaneously with coverage logging To activate line feature mapping 1 From the Display Setup screen select Feature Mapping and then tap Setup 2 Tap one of the four feature buttons to create or select an acti
356. s for the shift metric feet and inches or rows 4 Enter the distance to move the swath 5 Select the direction for the shift The shift occurs based on the direction of the vehicle not on the A to B orientation of the line For example if you select Left the line shifts left of the operator s perspective Note If you shift a line it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have applied 6 Tap OK The Swath Management screen appears The new shifted swath appears in the swath list on the left of the screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 61 3 Getting Started 62 Using the Guide to tabs The Guide to tabs allow automated steering along a swath line feature or FreeForm curve To use the Guide to tabs 1 Tap the Swaths button The Swath Management screen appears 2 From the Guide to tabs select one of the following Swaths for guidance along a swath Line Features for guidance along a line feature FreeForm for FreeForm curves 3 If you selected Swaths select the appropriate swath from the list on the left and then tap Load Line Features guidance automatically occurs on the nearest feature Tap Load The list shows the types and numbers of line features in the current field FreeForm select the appropriate FreeForm curve and then tap Load The Run screen appears The next time that you engage automated steering you are guided along the swath line fea
357. s in the Benchmarks table will update automatically 11 The plane is now defined Tap OK The Run screen appears Note The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field If there is a survey a cut fill map appears as the new design plane FmX Integrated Display User Guide 213 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Driving in Contour mode When you drive in Contour mode the FieldLevel II tab appears as follows Item Description Up Hill Left Select whichever of these buttons is appropriate Up Hill Right e Ifyou are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right select Up Hill Left e Ifyou are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left select Up Hill Right Coarse When selected the Up and Down arrows change the blade height by the Coarse Blade Step amount This enables you to move the blade by a large amount instead of small increments Up arrow Increase the design height by the Blade Step amount Down arrow Decrease the design height by the Blade Step amount Bench or Rebench_ Create a benchmark see Benchmarks page 180 Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Guide Select Guide to get lightbar guidance at the current level Logging Logs the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your Implement Width A shape file is created with
358. s move the line back to the correct path or by which the Trim buttons move the vehicle position The guidance line can move off target requiring Nudge as a result of GPS position drift when you return to the field for guidance for example after you pause or turn off the system GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field The vehicle can steer offline requiring Trim as a result of Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions Note The Nudge buttons become Trim buttons in RTK mode 2 Adjust the distance associated with the End of Row warning Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier warning and so a greater distance Set the Valve On Speed For vehicles that operate at normal speeds select Normal Additional settings are supported only with NavController II firmware versions 5 10 and later For vehicles operating at very slow speeds select Low or Ultra low Speed thresholds that you can select from the display are e Normal gt 0 4 m s 1 3 ft s e Low gt 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 e Ultra low gt 0 02 m s 0 07 ft s 4 Tap OK Configuring the implement controller Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed If the details in the Implement Controller Settings group are correct skip this step and go to Configu
359. s on the sprayer FmX Integrated Display User Guide 269 10 The Field IQ Plugin Drive Setup Valve Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Hardi Bypass Used on Hardi sprayers equipped with 3 way section valves that return flow to the tank when the boom section is off Pump Servo Servo valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Electric over Hydraulic A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output 270 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Feedback Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Flow Meter Type Select the type of flow meter that is connected Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number from the flow meter tag Min Flow Enter the required minimum flow rate for the system Use this setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level FmX Integrated Display User Guide 271 10 The Field IQ Plugin Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup Setting Description Add Sensor Add a new sensor Edit Sensor Edit or view the settings for an existing sensor Remove Sensor Delete an existing sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information
360. s or Cancel to restore the os y previous settings p w ei Orientation Front E Roll Offset na Ea ES The display records the roll offset in the second direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read 140 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 6 7 Vehicle Guidance Options The T2 calibration results will appear in the Roll Offset window The Roll Offset value should be between 0 and 4 Tap OK The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen appears Calibrating and setting the EZ Steer parameters 5 To calibrate the EZ Steer system and set the correct steering performance parameters the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along the A B line L From the Z Steer Steering Calibration screen select Steering Performance The EZ Steer Steering Performance screen appears To configure the Angle per Turn settings select the Step 1 tab EZ Steer Steering Performance 2 S6550000000000000000005 Iate eet Clee Dite Average Ofte 0 00 0 0 meh 49 52 46 52 Step 1 Step 2 Step 9 Angle Per Turn fags Por Tore Start by opening afield ond setting am AB line entime Di D ad tie setting on this tab nup nize system performance using Angie Per Tum x Fa irl Ap ajndar _ gt r as This is the angle that the wheels turn through during one full rotation of the steering
361. se in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we wan
362. se the tab before then tap the tab Upper left status text item Upper right status text item Slide out tab Applied Rate 0 00 gal a Auxiliary Valve Disabled Target Rate 5 00 gal a Current Flow Area to Empty 0 00 gal min Control Speed Total Vol Applied 3 59 mph 139 2 gal Tank Bin Level tal Vol Applied N 0 00 gal 139 2 gal Area to Empty Bital Vol Applied NH3 n a 139 2 gal To configure which status text items appear on the Info screen see Status items page 79 78 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Status items Display Setup 4 The status items are ordered by plugin If a plugin is removed the items associated with it are no longer available The available items are as follows shown in alphabetic order Item Description blank The status text time is not shown Altitude The current height of the vehicle Applied Rate The current application rate Area to Empty The area that can still be applied before the tank is empty Auxiliary Valve The current status of the auxiliary valve Available Memory The amount of free space on the display s internal memory Average Population The average rate across all rows Avg Seed Spacing The average distance between seeds based on the average sample size Blade Height The current height of the blade Boot Depth The depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of th
363. section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay and the sytem will turn off aft
364. select the AB Line field pattern Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 In the A Heading window enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous AB Line to use its heading The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading Tap New Straight The Run screen appears Drive to the start of the line and then tap Set A Tap Use A The new A line appears Tap Done Creating a curved line l From the Swath Management screen select the Curve field pattern from the drop down list Enter an access path if required See Adding an access path page 59 Tap New Curve The Run screen appears Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap Set A FmX Integrated Display User Guide 53 3 Getting Started To stop recording your exact path and create a straight section of line tap the Record button See page 55 5 Drive the curve until you reach the end point and then tap Set B The new curve appears Creating a headland A Headland is a straight AB Line or an A line pattern that is confined inside a boundary This boundary is called the headland Note Ifyou want to create a headland based on the A line pattern select the straight line pattern and then set the A heading for the internal line Then complete the following steps 1 From the Swath Management screen select the Headlands field pattern from the drop down list 2 In the Headlands win
365. set the display to its default values This can be useful if e you made changes to the display settings the results are poor but you cannot determine which setting was the cause e you move the display from one vehicle to another Note If you restore the defaults the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset To restore the default settings 1 From the Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Setup The Display Setup screen appears 2 Tap Default A confirmation screen appears 466 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 3 Tap Yes The default settings are restored Viewing FmX integrated display diagnostic information Display configuration information To view display configuration information tap A at the top right of the display The Home screen shows e Display firmware information e Autopilot controller information e GPS receiver and correction method information e Vehicle make and model USB memory stick information To view information about the USB memory stick that is in the display select the System option and then tap Diagnostics on the Configuration screen The card information tab appears on the System Diagnostics screen Viewing vehicle diagnostic information From the Configuration screen select the Autopilot option and then tap Diagnostics The Vehicle Controller Setup Guidance screen appears There are five parts to the Vehicle Diagnostics menu e G
366. settings for Status On The system will track the bin tank level and provide warnings Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level A warning will appear on your screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the amount specified in the Partial Refill field 266 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Row Offset Setup Row Offset Setup provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset that is entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard See Implement Configuration Measurements page 165 e Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered impl
367. so supports one or more LB25 external lightbars Purchased separately from the display the LB25 lightbar can be mounted directly on the display horizontally or vertically using the hardware that is supplied with the lightbar or mounted separately from the display in another part of the vehicle s cab using the supplied suction cup mount The lights on the external lightbar replicate the operation of the lights on the display s virtual lightbar For more information on installing and configuring the LB25 external lightbar see Chapter 21 The LB25 External Lightbar 38 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER Getting Started Introduction to field features This chapter explains the basic usage and Starting a field concepts of the FmX integrated display Closing a field The Run screen layout Introduction to coverage logging Prescriptions FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 39 3 Getting Started Introduction to field features You can place field features in the field to define points of interest or areas to avoid There are three types of field feature Feature type Defines Example Point A single point in a field Tree Line A straight or curved line in a field Fence Area An area of land Pond Configure field features that you will want to add to your fields and then assign up to four of them to buttons These buttons appear on the Mapping tab on the Run screen You ca
368. splay User Guide 341 12 The TrueGuide Plugin 342 FmX Integrated Display User Guide CHAPTER The TrueTracker Plugin In this chapter One of the FmX integrated display features that can be unlocked is the TrueTracker implement m About the TrueTracker system steering system m Comiaiaiion This chapter describes the TrueTracker system m Using the TrueTracker system and how to configure it to steer implements more accurately FmX Integrated Display User Guide 343 13 The TrueTracker Plugin About the TrueTracker system 344 The TrueTracker implement steering system is an upgrade for the Autopilot automated steering system With the Autopilot system the vehicle receives guidance and pulls the implement When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system the implement receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy The system comprises two parts e Additional hardware installed on the implement e Additional FmX integrated display software provided by the TrueTracker plugin The TrueTracker system extends the sub inch year to year repeatable accuracy of the Autopilot automated steering system to the implement Terminology The term implement steering refers to the ability to actively steer the implement that a vehicle is towing Normally it is not possible to tell the exact location of the implement When you use the FmX integrated display with the Autopilot automated steering system for sub inch a
369. sprayer 304 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Setup Valve Setup tab Setting Description Valve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 305 10 The Field IQ Plugin Feedback Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Flow Meter Type Select the type of flow meter that is connected Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number from the flow meter tag Min Flow Enter the required minimum flow rate for the system Use this setting to keep the control valve and flow meter above the minimum operating level 306 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup Setting Description Add Sensor Add a new sensor Edit Sensor Edit or view the settings for an existing sensor Remove Sensor Delete an existing sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information Setting Description Sensor Type Select from e Air pressure vacuum e Liquid pressure e NH3 pressure e Bin level e RPM e Gate Height Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module Select the Field IQ module that is controlling this sensor Input location Specify whi
370. ss will result in damage to the FmX integrated display and will void the warranty Item Description Trimble part number o FmX integrated display 93100 01 2 FmX power cable 66694 FmX power cable with relay and switch power bus 67259 O Basic power cable 67258 e FmX to NavController II cable with port replicator 75741 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 421 19 VRS Plugin for DCM 300 and Ag3000 Modems Item Description Trimble part number O 2 pin DTM to 2 pin DT power adaptor 67095 7 NavController II 55563 00 8 8m GPS TNC TNC RT angle cable 76442 AG25 GNSS antenna 68040 00S 10 Main NavController II cable 54601 11 Ag3000 to FmX FM 1000 cable 77273 12 Ag3000 break out cable 70433 Ag3000 modem 80300 Activating the Ag3000 modem In the USA the Ag3000 is bundled with a Trimble installed AT amp T card which is tied to your Ag3000 unit and cannot be separated You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device Additionally the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network Outside of the USA you must contact your local VRS Now or third party cell provider for a SIM card Configuring the Ag3000 modem 1 Install the VRS plugin For more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 2 From the Configuration screen select the VRS plugin and then tap Setup The VRS Configuration screen appears VRS Configuration 2 Setup VAS Server
371. sure e g 60psi Since the penalty to under fertilize harm yield is usually greater than to over fertilize waste fertilizer it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown here You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and delivery system conditions Best practice To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system do the following e Do not use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine Even though all of the connectors and modules are fully sealed there is the potential of leakage from a pressurized stream e Every time the spray tank is filled take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors Try to check sensors at least once a day during full time operation e Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine e Ifyou do not have ground protection devices on the boom such as gauge wheels or skids take extra care to not run the boom into the ground Also be aware of sensor vulnerability to stationary structures in the field FmX Integrated Display User Guide 331 11 332 The GreenSeeker Plugin Sensors are usually mounted on the front of the boom and do not have rigid protection Rinse the boom at the end of every day Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any corrosive materials Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine Sensors should be re calibrated after approximately
372. t Set Item d To save the configuration tap OK 86 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 The Info Screen tab The Jnfo Screen tab lets you allocate which items will be displayed on the Info screen The status text items appropriate for your current plugins appear in the Info Items list Select Status items G S 1 Set the left Info text items a Inthe Jnfo Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left Set Item button c Repeat Step a and Step b until you have all the items you require or the list is full The information appears in the left field 2 Set the right Info text items In the Jnfo Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right Set Item button c Repeat Step a and Step b until you have all the items you require or the list is full The information appears in the right field d To save the configuration tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 87 4 Display Setup Selecting the language units of measure and keyboard layout To select the default language for the display 1 Inthe Display Setup screen select Language amp Units and then tap SETUP The Language amp Units setup screen appears 2 Select the language to use from the Language drop down list If you change the language a message warns that the display will turn off so that the change can take effect The default language is English 3 To select the unit of measure for the display
373. t page 382 the Distance in meters decimal feet feet and inches in the Distance field The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance Note The first pulse occurs at the A point Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns the duration of the pulse in milliseconds ms in the Duration field the distance in the Within Distance field The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online If the vehicle is more than this distance offline no pulse occurs When Within Area Feature the Lead Time See Calibrating the lead time for your implement page 382 Note The pulse occurs only when Remote Output is enabled You must also enable Remote Output for each area feature individually in the Mapping plugin setup See Creating an area feature page 92 When Engaged nothing There are no options to set Remote output occurs when the system is engaged 5 Tap OK Remote output is now configured If you are using Distance Based Pulse or When Within Area Feature calibrate the Lead Time setting to match your implement Calibrating the lead time for your implement There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that pulse triggers an action on the implement To compensate for this system delay you can set a lead time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the action occurs at the correct location For this calibration y
374. t Enabled from the Relative Heights drop down list By default coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark Setting the relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened You can set the relative position using these values the X axis coordinate Relative X the Y axis coordinate Relative Y the height Height Offset 7 Enter the appropriate offset in each field and then tap OK to return to the Survey Setup screen X Tip To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on he slide out tab 8 Select whether or not the system will force you to rebench each time that you reload the field Note Ifyou configure the Force Rebench setting to No the RTK base station must be placed in exactly the same position for the field to be correct Configuring the implement for leveling 1 From the Configuration screen select Implement and then tap Setup FmX Integrated Display User Guide 179 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins 2 Configure each tab in the Implement Setup screen For more information see Adjusting the implement settings page 162 Note For a multiplane survey set the Swath Width field to the width that you will use for collecting interior points When you are not using FieldLevel GPS set the front back offset F B Offset to
375. t Height e When Cut is displayed the current ground is above the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points down which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is displayed the current ground is below the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points up which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Configuring the FieldLevel II plugin Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller There are four steps to complete e Step 1 Configuring the implement page 190 e Step 2 Configuring the leveling model page 190 e Step 3 Calibrating the FieldLevel II valve module page 193 e Step 4 Configuring the FieldLevel II GPS receiver page 194 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 189 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Step 1 Configuring the implement Ifyou have not already configured the implement see Configuring the implement for leveling page 179 Step 2 Configuring the leveling model Install the FieldLevel II plugin for more information see Adding or removing a plugin page 170 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Setup FieldLevel Il Setup 2 Select the leveling model from the drop down list Leveling model Description Point and Slope Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage
376. t file may be useful for troubleshooting The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad Importing AB Lines or boundaries 454 The FmX integrated display can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by an AgGPS 170 Field Computer Remote Data Logger RDL or a Geographic Information System GIS To load GIS boundaries files must be in WGS 84 latitudes longitudes and heights in decimal degrees Use the following method to import an AB Line or a boundary into the FmX integrated display 1 Attach the USB memory stick to an office computer CAUTION The three files that define a line or field shp shx and dbf must have identical names Otherwise they are not recognized If you put multiple sets of files in the folder ensure that you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten 2 Copy the following files to the AgGPS AB Lines folder on the USB memory stick lt field name gt shp lt field name gt shx lt field name gt dbf 3 Start the FmX integrated display and then tap Run 4 Doone of the following Open an existing field Start a new field 5 Tap Swaths FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Data Management 23 6 Tap Import Available Swaths E EE 7 Select the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap OK The field or AB Line is imported Swathe FreeForm sts se m
377. t to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking
378. tails of an existing material Delete delete an existing material 3 When you tap Add or Edit the Field IQ Setup Wizard appears The wizard contains seven tabs The information that appears on each tab depends on the operation you are setting up Enter accurate information into each field of the wizard Linking materials The Field IQ system can link primary and secondary materials where the secondary material uses the output of the primary material For example LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output of Tru Count Air Clutch systems When planting seeding or strip tilling you can link the following together e Liquid e Granular seed FmX Integrated Display User Guide 231 10 The Field IQ Plugin e Granular fertilizer Anhydrous cannot be linked When the system is in diagnostics mode the secondary material is not functional When the system is in diagnostics mode you can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary material 1 In the Section Control tab in the Section Control field select Link to Material 2 Inthe Linked Material field select the primary material that you want to link to 3 Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control For more information see the sections for each type below 232 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting up the Field IQ system for Planting Make sure that you have set your implement to Plan
379. tant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Valve calibration 1 Tap Valve Calibration The following screen appears 284 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 2 Select the Valve tab and then select the appropriate value for each field For this field Select one of the following options Valve Type Pump Servo The Pump Servo setting controls an electric motor which actuates a hydraulic valve As the valve actuates it adjusts the hydraulic flow to the pump This valve adjusts the application rate indirectly PWM The PWM pump setting controls an electric solenoid valve which adjusts the hydraulic flow to the pump This valve adjusts the application rate indirectly Fast Servo A 4 wire electric motor turns a ball or butterfly valve to increase or decrease flow for example a DICKEY john servo Mid Tech servo or Raven Fast Valve Servo A 2 wire electric motor turns a ball or butterfly valve to increase or decrease flow for example a Raven standard servo Hardi bypass scenario Most commonly used on Hardi sprayers equipped with 3 way
380. ted Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Drive Calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Field IQ Calibration screen has four tabs Tab Description Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Auto Tuning A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle FmX Integrated Display User Guide 275 10 The Field IQ Plugin Tab Description Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration Flow calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate The Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen appears A CAUTION Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 1 Tap OK Enter a value for each of the following Flow Meter Type select an option from the drop down list 276 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Flowmeter Calibration enter the number from the flow meter tag MinFlow enter the required
381. tem records logging when the switch is turned off and stops recording when the switch is turned on Note When remote logging is set to Connector A or Connector B the Logging button on the Run screen is disabled Use the external switch to turn logging on or off FmX Integrated Display User Guide 435 22 Advanced Configuration Changing the password Note To change the Administration password you require the Master password If you do not know it contact your local Trimble reseller See also Password access page 73 L 5 Do one of the following Ifyou have not entered the password during the current session tap Setup or Calibrate from the Configuration screen Ifyou have already entered the password during this session tap the Home button and then tap Lock Configuration On the Configuration screen tap Setup or Calibrate The Enter Administration Password screen appears Enter an incorrect password The Wrong Password screen appears Tap Enter Master Password Enter the Master password and then tap OK The Change Administration Password screen appears Enter your new Administration password in both fields The new Administration password is now active Locking the display to re enable the password To re enter the password if you have already entered the Administration Password l 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap A Tap Configure Tap Lock Config Tap Setup or Calibrate The Enter Adm
382. ter and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab See Material page 233 Layout page 235 Section Control page 236 Rate Control page 238 Row Monitoring page 241 Sensors page 242 Operation page 243 Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Field IQ Setup Setting Description Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting e Row Crop Seed e Liquid e Granular Seed e Granular Fertilizer e Anhydrous Material Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Material Details Tap Setup to open the Hybrid Setup screen See Logging varieties page 65 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 233 10 The Field IQ Plugin Setting Description Application Rate Rate Alarms Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 1 e Target Rate 2 This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the Rate switch is in position 2 e Rate Increment When the Rate switch is in the Rate 1 or Rate 2 position the current application rate incr
383. th overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area e Coverage Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off e Boundary Switching Overlap Enter the percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area Fence Nozzles Many setups require a left fence nozzle to be configured even when there is no left fence nozzle For more information refer to your sprayer installation instructions Right Nozzle Wiring 268 FmX Integrated Display User Guide In you are using an EZ Boom replacement harness select the EZ Boom setting Otherwise select the Field IQ setting Rate Control tab Adjust the rate control settings The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Rate Control On The system sets the target rate Off Section switching only Rate Control Module Location Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the implement and the width they will control Drive Setup When you tap Drive Setup a screen appears with the following tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup The tabs are explained in more detail on the following pages Number of Nozzles Enter the number of spray nozzle
384. the farm The following diagram shows the Farm folder and file organization Data Management Ble Edt View Favorites Tools Hep Ge P seme F raters X WD E Folders B Desktop E My Documents E W My Computer lt Local Disk C 2 d ow rw Drive Field folder Each Field folder stores e A subfolder for each event performed on the field See Event folder page 449 e Three Swaths files 23 e Ifit is a bounded headland field three Boundary files See Field boundary and AB Line files page 450 e An empty file whose name represents the coordinates of the field boundary file for example 172 000E43 000S12H pos locates the boundary at latitude 172 000 East longitude 43 000 South and altitude 12 m high e Any recorded features files See Features files page 453 e Any paused files See Pausing guidance page 64 e The field event history file EventHistory dbf It contains information about each event carried out in the field See Event History file page 452 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 447 23 Data Management The following figure shows how a Field folder and its files are organized MF AgGPS Data Smith Farms Meadowbrook South Field BD OVORW Drive B SanDisk imagemate E B O Agcrs O 48 tines S O Autopilot Data A Smith Farms H Meadowbrook 448 FmX Integrated Display User
385. the slope calculation e resets the height e resets the cut fill Coarse move the blade by the Coarse Blade Step amount To do this press the or button Delete Benchmark delete the benchmark at the current location Note You do not have to drive over a benchmark to delete it Logging log the coverage so that you can see on your map where you have been dependent on your implement width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information 208 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Defining a plane You can define a plane in the Plane Editor on the FmX integrated display To do this use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope requirements The following figure show the required elements Element Description Pivot The single benchmark where the plane is defined All slopes will pivot around this point Benchmark Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined It has a Primary Slope and Primary Heading component The Primary Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the primary axis Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined The Cross Heading will always be 90 or 270 from the Primary Heading The Cross Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the cross axis To define the plane by a single heading and slope then you should set the
386. then tap OK 3 From the Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK Setting up the Field IQ system for Air Seeding Make sure that you have set your implement to Seeder and that you have configured the implement see Configuring the display page 73 In the Material Overview screen tap New to open the Field IQ Setup Wizard The Wizard contains the following seven tabs For information on this tab See Material page 252 Layout page 254 Section Control page 255 Rate Control page 257 Row Monitoring page 260 Sensors page 261 Operation page 262 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 251 10 The Field IQ Plugin Material tab Enter information about the material you want to set up Setting Description Material Type Select your Field IQ application type Note If spraying chemicals use the liquid fertilizer setting e Row Crop Seed e Liquid e Granular Seed e Granular Fertilizer e Anhydrous Material Name Use the virtual keyboard to enter a name for the material Material Details Tap Setup to open the Hybrid Setup screen See Logging varieties page 65 252 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Application Rate Rate Alarms Rates tab Adjust the following Rate settings e Target Rate This setting controls the volume that the implement supplies when the
387. tility files and the data folders in the AgGPS folder saved on a USB memory stick by the FmX integrated display E S Local Disk C Gb WORW Orive D S B SanDisk ImageMate E AD Lines Autopilot Data El Smith Farms 5 Meadowbrook south Field Planing O Spraying O Diagnostics Autopilot Sceenshots oe Fermware Prescriptions Summaries H upgrade Ele p t yew Favorites Tools tep Oa O 3 P seh i roes LS gt X WD E Agress O E agars Desktop My Documents G Autoptot W My Computer Cadets diegnostics Firmware Prescriptions Summaries amp area eatureDictionary txt zj imolements FMD xmi IineFeatureoxtonary txt pomtFeaturedicbonary txt 1B 1KB 1KB 1K58 FmX Integrated Display User Guide 445 23 Data Management Client folder The Client folder stores a sub folder for each farm defined for the client The following diagram shows the Client folder and file organization B C AgGPS Data Smith Farms Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help O B Dees E rae i gt X 1 D EMPS Data Smith Farms Desktop M My Documents E W My Computer lt Local Disk C uid DVD RW Drive D H SanDisk ImageMate E a ayes EE 446 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Farm folder The Farm folder stores a subfolder for each field defined for
388. tion 72 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 Password access Any Setup or Calibrate button marked with a padlock icon J is protected by two passwords Password type Description Administration password Your password The default is 2009 Master password A backup password in case you lose the Administration password If you require the Master password contact your local reseller The password screen appears the first time that you tap a Setup or Calibrate button after you turn on the display Use the virtual keyboard to enter the Administration password and then tap OK Note Passwords are case sensitive Configuring the display 1 In the Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Setup 2 Ifnecessary enter the Administrator password See Password access page 73 Display Setup In the Display Setup screen you can configure Display preferences Map settings including Night mode Status item configuration Language and units including keyboard layout setup Default settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide 73 4 Display Setup 74 Mapping preferences Feature mapping configuration Data dictionary editor Data files management this appears at the top of the Display Setup list Display options External lightbar setup Guidance setup Sound settings Hardware configuration CAN bus settings Power management setup Time zo
389. tion Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Section Control tab Adjust the section control settings Field 1Q Setup Material Layout Section Control Setting Description Section Control On Enable section control for the current material Off Disable section control for the current material Rate as Section When a rate controller turns on or off the section turns on or off Link to Material See Linking materials page 231 236 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Setting Description Section Control Module Setup Tap Setup to configure the section control module s their location on the implement and the number of sections they will control Assign the Field IQ module to the correct location to ensure it controls the correct section Number of Modules Enter the number of Field IQ section control modules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each s
390. tions screen tap Configure 2 Select the Autopilot option and then tap Setup Vehicle Controller Port cn OK Vehicle Controller Settings Current Selection CASE STX500Q AG Edit Autopilot Settings Settings TAP AP Simulation 3 From the Connector drop down list select either A ext GPS or B ext GPS and then tap OK The Configuration screen appears 4 Select the Autopilot option s GPS receiver and then tap Setup Settings Advanced Ragar Output Port ext GPS ponme gt o 7 NMEA Output Cancel Vehicle OK 5 From the Corrections drop down list select the required correction option 6 Tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 135 5 Vehicle Guidance Options EZ Steer assisted steering system guidance The EZ Steer assisted steering system works with the FmX integrated display s internal GPS receiver to provide vehicle guidance Installing the EZ Steer controller For information on installing the EZ Steer controller in your vehicle refer to the EZ Steer Assisted Steering System Getting Started Guide and the EZ Steer Assisted Steering System Installation Instructions Connecting the EZ Steer system mX integrated display EZ Steer motor Item Description Trimble part number 1 Antenna cable 50449 2 FmX basic power cable 67258 FmX power cable 66694 O FMX power bus 67259 5 FmX to EZ Steer cable 757
391. tive channel If you want to use these statistics start a new event before you change the active channel Application width You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller The FmX integrated display draws coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections If you turn boom sections off the FmX integrated display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Serial Rate Control Plugin 14 Bogballe Calibrator To use the Bogballe Calibrator you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 to connect to the FmX cable P N 67091 that is connected to Port A or B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Note The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from making a connection In this case remove the standoff nuts Configuring the controller To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FmX display do the following l Press Return Return Fertil Distrib Select Type Bogballe E EX Accept Vaderstad Control Station To use the Vaderstad Control Station you need a special adapter cable Trimble P N DCA6219 with a crossover serial cable null modem that connects to the Vaderstad program cable Vaderstad P N 428017 Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station
392. to assign a feature to 4 Doone of the following To create a new feature and assign it to the button select the type of feature to create point line or area from the drop down list and then tap New The Edit Feature screen appears To assign an existing feature to the button select the type of feature to edit point line or area select the feature from the list that appears and then tap OK The Select Active Feature screen reappears with the feature that you selected assigned to the feature button Creating a point feature 1 Enter values for the following settings Item Description Name The name of the feature For example Tree Alarm Radius When the vehicle comes within this radius of the feature the alarm appears The alarm radius appears on the screen as a solid red block of color The alarm radius is more serious than the warning radius so set it to a shorter distance Warning Radius The distance around the feature that causes a warning message to appear The warning radius appears on the screen as an orange line Average Position This is a way to improve the quality of the point feature position e If you click Yes the display calculates the average position of the feature over 30 seconds e Ifyou click No the display places the feature at the coordinates that the vehicle is at when you tap the button 2 To select the feature appearance color tap Color 90 FmxX Integrat
393. tructions mee sr Volts 252 i wim a Move the tractor forward slowly Center the steering wheel and then tap Next Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message appears The value in the Volts field is updated as you turn the steering wheel Instructions Steer Full Right and Press Next Volts 419 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 117 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message appears The following screen appears Instructions Steer Straight and Press Next Volts 250 ES Ey le 6 Center the steering wheel While the wheel is at the center position tap Next The value in the Volts field is updated as you turn the steering wheel Instructions Press Restart to Repeat the Test Volts 250 Degrees 0 0 ot tet we 7 Tap OK to accept the calibration 118 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 Calibrating the automated steering deadzone The Automated Deadzone calibration procedure runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at w
394. tting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some sprayers have steering that is slow to react after you turn the steering wheel The system uses the steering delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point Swather When you configure the system on a swather the Swather steering delay setting is available on the Vehicle Setup screen Some swathers have steering that is slow to react after the steering wheel is turned The system uses the steering delay setting to compensate for this slowness and ensure that steering corrections occur at the correct point To improve the performance of your swather adjust the Swather steering delay setting by a small amount 0 1 seconds at a time Test the result between each adjustment After using the EZ Steer system After you finish using the EZ Steer system do the following e Before you leave the vehicle turn off the EZ Steer system power switch or remove the power plug e Ifthe EZ Steer system is not being used pivot the motor away from the steering wheel FmX Integrated Display User Guide 147 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 148 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The GPS Receiver m Configuring the GPS receiver m Autoseed fast restart technology m Configuring a GPS receiver with the AgRemote software Enabling NMEA message output Enabling radar output CHAPTER When you install either the Manual
395. ture or FreeForm curve Using Skip to fine tune navigation The software uses the original swath that you drove to automatically generate the position of the other swaths Occasionally these new on screen swaths do not perfectly reflect where your swaths are For example you may need to skip to the other side of a road To correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field use the Skip function After the swaths are generated 1 From the Run screen tap f 2 Enter the Skip distance and then tap OK The guidance line moves the required amount The default distance displayed in the edit box reflects your current position The shift occurs based on the direction of the vehicle not on the A to B orientation of the line For example if you select Left the line shifts left of the operator s perspective Note The Skip position is temporary it is not saved to the line permanently To save a line adjustment use the Shift feature See Shifting a swath page 61 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Getting Started 3 Placing field features on screen For a description of field features and how to configure the field feature buttons see Feature mapping page 89 For instructions on how to create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field see Activating field boundaries page 92 To add a field feature to the map 1 Select the
396. uid 19 Tap OK Defining a Custom Table For growers or crop consultants having crop historical knowledge allows them to determine different crop input requirements based upon biomass size of the crop plant An example of this type of use would be variable rate application of defoliant in cotton or desiccant in potatoes For these cases the field is scouted or field calibrated to determine areas of the field that require different rates of defoliant The RT200 system or a GreenSeeker hand held can be used to obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field and then a table can be created with NDVI values corresponding to application rates To create a custom table do the following 1 From the GreenSeeker Calibration screen select the Algorithm tab FmX Integrated Display User Guide 327 11 328 The GreenSeeker Plugin 2 In the Formula list select Custom Table or Auto Calibration Ifyou select Custom Table you must enter NDVI calibration values manually See Step 3 Ifyou select Auto Calibration the system automatically enters NDVI calibration values from the Calibration step by transferring the Maximum Average and Minimum NDVI values into rows two three and four respectively Go to Step 7 Select the Number Of Rows field Use the on screen keypad to enter a value and then tap OK The number of available NDVI and Rate fields are dictated by the value entered in the Number Of Rows field
397. uidance screen e Steering screen e Details screen e Fault log screen e View warning screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 467 24 Troubleshooting Vehicle Diagnostics Guidance screen Item Section Description o Offline distance graph A graph of offline distance over time It is useful for diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and staying online 2 GPS status The current GPS position fix quality and number of satellites Heading error Shows the difference between vehicle heading and path heading 4 Roll Shows the current roll value calculated by the system 5 Direction The current vehicle direction forward backward or stopped Cross Track Error A numeric value of the offline distance 7 Virtual lightbar Visual representation of offline distance 8 Heading The current vehicle heading calculated by the system Speed The current vehicle speed calculated by the system 10 1PPS Shows whether the 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver is detected 11 Aggressiveness A slider for adjusting the Aggressiveness of the steering system Engagebutton Engages disengages the system and shows the current engage state When this button is red tap it to see the fault that is preventing automatic mode 468 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Troubleshooting 24 Vehicle Diagnostics Steering screen Vehicle Controller Setup Stee
398. ules you will use Module Select the module number that corresponds to each section Number of Sections Assign the number of sections that each module will control Section Grouping Assign the rows that are in each section Advanced Wire Assignment Every section is controlled by a specific wire on each Field IQ module Use this setting to specify which module each section is wired to Section Control Tap Setup to adjust settings for each section control module Section Control Type Select the type of section control for each module Off When Stopped When set to Yes the control valve will close when ground speed reaches 0 with the master switch position in On When set to No the control valve will hold its last position when the master switch is shut off and ground speed reaches 0 if the vehicle is a clutch operated planter set this option to No so that you can continue planting when the vehicle is stopped Otherwise select Yes On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the
399. ur last job will still be current so you are often just verifying that the correct formula is being used 9 Input the various fields as required The fields displayed will change based upon the formula selected some fields such as Nitrogen Use Efficiency have default values that are formula specific but all are able to be changed by selecting the field and using the screen keypad Note You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of the CumGDD E or similar fields For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1 3 GrtPins GDD OKState is Cumulative Growing Degree Days Base 50F For specific algorithm instructions go to www GreenSeeeker com FmX Integrated Display User Guide 325 11 326 The GreenSeeker Plugin 10 Select the Chart tab GreenSeeker Calibration 11 Inthe Limit list select Enabled or Disabled 12 If necessary enter a Max Limit value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations 13 Tap OK 14 Enter a Min Limit value 15 Tap OK Note Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller 16 Review the application chart for each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections and or application equipment settings FmX Integrated Display User Guide The GreenSeeker Plugin 11 17 Select the Output Tab GreenSeeker Calibration e 18 Inthe Material Type list select either Granular or Liq
400. uration settings m Configuring the display CHAPTER This chapter describes how to configure the basic settings and appearance the display Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes FmX Integrated Display User Guide 71 4 Display Setup Accessing the system configuration settings To configure the system settings do the following 1 From the Home screen tap K 2 From the Current Configurations screen tap Configure The Configuration screen appears with the currently installed plugins listed on the left of the screen Configuration System New System 3 Tap System and then tap one of the following Tap To Setup Set up the system See Configuring the display page 73 Calibrate Calibrate the touchscreen so that it reads your selections accurately The FmX integrated display ships with the touchscreen already calibrated A CAUTION Do not use a sharp item such as a pencil to press the touchscreen as you may damage the surface of the screen Use your finger to press the screen Diagnostics View information about e Serial Communications e CAN Bus e System Information e Advanced e Power Levels e CPU Save Config Save the current system configuration Switch Config Switch to a saved system configura
401. ures there is no cross track error 9 Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return paths 10 Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results in Table 11 on page 127 Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right FmX Integrated Display User Guide 125 5 Vehicle Guidance Options 11 Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use Table 11 on page 127 to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run INAN Left offset Calculating the roll offset Flag offset method 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle The vehicle draw bar must be centered 2 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 zero on the Roll Correction screen See 3 Configuring the roll offset correction page 125 4 Create an AB Line 5 Start anew pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 126 FmX Integrated Display User Guide Vehicle Guidance Options 5 6 Park the vehicle and exit the c
402. ust be entered Threshold the change in height value that will trigger the filter Decay Time once the filter is triggered this will be the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height Step 3 Calibrating the FieldLevel II valve module Note Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type 1 From the Configuration screen select the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Calibrate Field Level Calibration je 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 Tap Start The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration fields and then tap OK FmX Integrated Display User Guide 193 9 The FieldLevel II Plugins Step 4 Configuring the FieldLevel Il GPS receiver The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade To configure this receiver 1 From the Configuration screen select the GPS Receiver option that is associated with the FieldLevel II plugin and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver drop down list select which GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system Trimble recommends that you select Internal Primar
403. ve Type Servo 2 wire standard servo valve Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve PWM 2 wire PWM valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Pump Servo Servo valve commonly used to control hydraulic flow to the pump Linear Actuator A valve that creates a linear motion as opposed to a rotary motion Electric over Hydraulic A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output 258 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Feedback Setup tab Drive Setup Setting Description Shaft Encoder Constant Pulses per revolution Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratiion Constant Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio FmX Integrated Display User Guide 259 10 The Field IQ Plugin Row Monitoring tab Field 1Q Setup Setting Description Row Monitoring Disabled Turn row monitoring off Blockage Select this option for air seeding or when applying granular material Row Sensor Enable Turn individual row sensors on or off Row Sensor Wiring Select which wire each row sensor is wired to Setup 260 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The Field IQ Plugin 10 Sensors tab Add or edit sensor settings Field IQ Setup
404. ve line feature and then tap OK 94 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Display Setup 4 3 From the Record Line With Coverage drop down list select the required line feature and then tap OK The Display Setup screen appears 4 Tap OK Data Dictionary The data dictionary editor enables you to predefine the entry options defined below and then select them from a pick list during field and event definition Data dictionary entry fields Client Implement Target pests Farm Application method Custom 1 Field Wind speed Custom 2 Event Wind gust speed Custom 3 Operator Wind direction Custom 4 Operator EPA Sky conditions Material Harvest year Soil conditions Stoppage reason Farm location Soil type Vehicle Crop 1 From the Display Setup screen select Data Dictionary and then tap Setup Data Dictionary Setup _ Oy bob smith 2 From the data list select the data field to define and then tap either New or Edit 3 Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name and then tap OK The new or edited entry appears in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 95 4 Display Setup 96 For more information on accessing and editing data dictionary entries see Data dictionaries page 460 Lightbar The display has two lightbar options e The virtual lightbar that appears at the top of the display s Run screen e One or more external lightbars See Chapter 2
405. work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under th
406. y Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When you tap the fill disk Start button the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death WARNING When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position the machine is fully operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so could result in injury or death WARNING The display contains a single use Lithium sulfide LiSO battery Do not expose the battery to temperatures greater than 71 C 160 F as the battery may explode FmxX Integrated Display User Guide 5 Safety AN WARNING NH is an irritant and corrosive to the skin eyes respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly It may cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times A WARNING The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death 6 FmX Integrated Display User Gu
407. y when configuring the display as a stand alone FieldLevel II system but you can use an external GPS receiver If you are also using the Autopilot system Trimble recommends that you use Internal Secondary as the Autopilot system will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver 3 From the Corrections drop down list select RTK for all FieldLevel II applications 4 Set the Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver 5 Tap OK The FieldLevel II plugin is now configured and ready to use 194 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Operating the FieldLevel II plugin Run screen The FmX integrated display s Run screen changes when the FieldLevel II plugin is installed It can also change depending which leveling model is selected Fal TAO 090000000000 0000000000 Item Description Description o Virtual lightbar Provides guidance with illuminated LEDs When using the FieldLevel II Contour leveling model the virtual lightbar can be used for levee marking Also in the Autoslope leveling model it will guide you onto the design alignment when installing tile or cleaning a surface ditch 2 Cut fill map Shows the difference between the design plane and the survey Green areas are on grade blue areas require fill and the red areas require cut Status items tab Open to view a variety of text information regarding the operation of t
408. y while you record the shape The boundary is defined on the screen by a single red line The current position is strung back to the start point of the boundary until you finish recording so the boundary is always a closed loop Defining interior points After you survey the boundary of the field select nterior from the list and then tap Record As you drive the system records interior points To complete a full survey create guidance lines and then drive over all of the interior of the field boundary while the system records interior points Defining a section After you define a boundary you can define sections to split the field into parts This enables you to create a design for just that section rather than the whole field There are two ways to define a section e Begin recording the section line outside the boundary Drive through the field to define the section line and then cross outside the boundary again The section is defined e Record a section line inside the boundary The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary Sections can be useful after you finish working on the field for the day Define the area that you completed as a section when you return to the field you can level the remaining area to a second best fit plane See Operating the FieldLevel II plugin page 195 FmxX Integrated Display User Guide Field design The FieldLevel II Plugins 9 Once you have completed the survey the AutoPlan
409. ystem down if the implement drops below the specified speed Minimum Override Speed This setting maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds When Outside Field Boundary Switch off The system will not apply outside the boundary area Operate The system will take into account latency settings when entering the boundary or exclusion zones Material Controlled By Enabled The material is tied to the Master Switch Box and cannot be controlled individually Disabled The Material is not tied to the Master Switch box and is controlled by virtual buttons on the Run screen Rate Snapping Enabled Shows the applied rate the same as the target rate if the applied rate is within 10 of the target rate Disabled Shows the actual applied value Material Setup Complete screen When you have completed setting up a new material the Material Setup Complete screen appears You can select Add another material You are returned to the start of the Field IQ Setup Wizard e Finish Setup You are returned to the Material Overview screen FmX Integrated Display User Guide 243 10 The Field IQ Plugin Calibrating the implement lift switch 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next
410. ystem performance the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console 354 FmX Integrated Display User Guide The TrueTracker Plugin 13 e Ifyou perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures once the system is at operating temperature To configure the automated steering deadzone 1 Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards 2 Raise the implement 3 Select the Implement Automatic Deadzone procedure from the calibration list See page 352 4 Tap Next to continue The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen appears 5 Tap Next in the two screens that appear next Note Read the onscreen instructions on each page Follow the instructions The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both directions several times 6 Tap Start The system engages and performs the calibration FmX Integrated Display User Guide 355 13 The TrueTracker Plugin Automated Deadzone error messages If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully one of the following error messages appears Message

Gemini User Guide - Ag Tech Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents